外研版九年级上册教学工作总结（共13篇）
第1篇：外研版九年级上册教学计划
九年级英语上册教学计划
一、教学目标
通过训练学生的听、说、读、写，使学生掌握最基本的语言知识和语言技能，从而培养学生初步运用英语进行交际的能力；寓教于乐，使学生养成良好的外语学习习惯，为将来的学习打下坚实的基础。以教材为载体，密切结合教材，在课堂上努力创设各种情景夯实语言知识及语言技能，从而激发学生主动学习英语的兴趣，提高学生的记忆、观察、思维及想象能力，为学生的终身学习奠定基础。
二、学情分析
我任教九年级
一、二班英语。从整体情况来看，一班学生普遍英语基础较差，兴趣不高，甚至有部分学生的听、说、读、写能力还不如小学五年级水平，所以在课堂教学时，出现有学生不守课堂规则，不愿听课、做与课堂无关事情的现象，难以形成英语学习氛围。有部分学生基础较好，自制能力较强，能认真听课，按老师要求完成各项任务。二班稍稍好一些，总的来说，这两个班的英语教学具有挑战性，需要耗费时间和精力。
三、教材分析
九年级英语是外语教学与研究出版社出版的。教材编排有以下目的：
1、要使学生受到听、说、读、写、英语的训练，掌握最基础的语言知识和语言技能以及培养初步运用英语交际的能力；养成良好的外语学习习惯，掌握学习外语的基本方法；为进一步学习和运用英语打下扎实的基础。
2、使学生明确学习英语的目的性，3、培养初步运用英语交际的能力和自学能力。
教材内容：九年级英语上册，共十二模块，它包含了“状语从句，被动语态，定语从句”。这些是让学生感到头痛的语法项目，也是初中阶段很重要的语法点。
四、教学措施与教学方法
利用多媒体图文并茂、生动活泼地呈现教学内容，把语言学习和实际生活结合起来，增强学生的听说能力。并通过开展各种任务性活动，巩固所学的知识。鼓励学生通过思考、体验、参与、合作等方式来学习，增强学生独立思考的良好习惯以及口语表达和合作学习的能力；通过阅读训练，培养学生根据不同的阅读任务，运用适宜的阅读策略获取信息的本领，达到提高学生的英语理解能力和语言运用能力的目的。同时，注重学生学习兴趣的培养，以不同方式最大限度的激发学生的学习动机；并让他们了解英语交际中常用的体态语，鼓励学生借助手势、表情等非语言手段来提高交际效果；采用形式多样的写作练习，培养学生的想象力和提高学生的写作技巧。并及时总结语法和日常用语，巩固所学语言知识，使学生对语言功能的认识，由感性上升到理性。在培养学生听、说、读、写语言技能的基础上，开展综合探究活动进一步拓展学生的语言知识，提高学生的语言技能。因此要做到下面几点;
(一)、继续培养学习习惯。外研版版英语教材是针对7-9年级英语学习者的特点而编写，起点为零。话题环环相扣，因此单词、句型再现率特别高，使学生的词汇量和语言知识像滚雪球一样不断循环滚动，逐渐增大，学生的英语水平呈螺旋式逐步提高。从七年级开始便着手培养学生的听、说、读、写四方面的能力，由于教材好教易学，这使得培养学生学习英语的良好习惯不太困难。如：要求学生把每天所学的单词、句型当天记好，第二天再进行听写, 并及时批改。每学完一个单元进行一次测验，并及时批改和评讲。狠抓课堂、作业和测试, 要求学生整理作业或测验中的错题，还要求他们在每次测验练习后写自我评价，总结其中的得与失。在课堂教学中，让学生在紧张有序、轻松愉悦的课堂氛围中表现自己，听说读写能力也随之得到了提高。并对他们的课堂活动加以评价，适时表扬，帮助他们树立起信心，保持对英语浓厚的兴趣。
（二）培养听、说、读、写的能力进一步提高。 培养听说能力：
⑴ 抓好早读，强调学生背诵重点的句型、对话和段落。
⑵ 课堂上多创设让学生多听、多开口说英语的机会。收集一些相关的课外资料，图片或音像等，找一些适合的话题，让学生用英语聊天。特别关注发生在学生身边的事，鼓励他们用英语说话。
进行阅读能力的训练：
单单靠在复习阅读专题时培养学生的阅读能力是远远不足的。所以，九年级上学期应该开始对学生进行有针对性的阅读训练，每周给学生几篇阅读文章，内容、题材、体裁多样，贴近学生身边的生活，而且富有时代性，目的是刺激学生的阅读欲望，全面提高学生的阅读能力。九年级下学期，阅读训练的内容则紧扣中考，要求每周完成一定量的阅读材料，并对他们的答题情况进行检查。
开展写作的训练：
本学期，要进行的是话题作文，给定一个与学生生活有关的话题，鼓励他们用英语表达自己的思想。下学期进行的是命题作文，涉及各类文体，并紧扣中考可能考到的文体或内容。
（三）、因材施教
（一）、抓好英语的常规教学，确保基础知识过关
1、单词、词组过关。利用自修时间、早读时间，让学生代表带读,并抽时间在课堂让学生听写单词.并把学过的词组归纳，帮助学生记忆的同时还要用词组造句 2、句型过关。组织学生结对子，一有空就你问我答，营造学习氛围，同时加强笔头的练习，使学生能熟能生巧
3、课文过关。把重点的课文分段，按学习组为单位，进行朗读比赛，对学过的课文尽量做到人人会背.（二）、抓好语法学习
1、做好每单元语法知识的归纳。
2、检查学生的笔记情况
3、定期检查学生练习完成情况
（三）、培养学生综合运用知识的能力，每个单元围绕着知识点反复训练，层层渗透。每个单元结束都进行测验，找出存在问题，及时补漏补缺
(四)、抓好阅读能力培养，每周规定学生阅读六篇短文，带着问题阅读，阅读之后要回答问题。争取提高学生的阅读能力和阅读水平
(五)、培养学生写作能力
每周完成一篇写作任务
(六)、抓尖子培养，努力做好后进生转化工作，促进全体学生共同进步。
1、指定学习成绩好的学生利用业余时间多读和多做课外书，同时尽量抽时间给学生进行检查。开展一帮一活动，争取把全班成绩提高。
2、多关心后进生的思想和学习，平时要检查和督促他们的作业及时给予他们帮助。
五、教学设想
1、认真专研教材和课标，精心备课，认真上好每一堂课。确定每堂课的基础内容，预备内容和拓展内容，满足不同层次学生的不同需求。
2、充分利用现有的现代化教学设备，加强直观教学，提高课堂效率。
3、多与学生沟通，了解学生学习状况和需求，及时改进教学中存在的问题和不足。
4、积极开展丰富多彩的英语活动，提高学生兴趣。如英语演讲比赛、单词听写比赛、朗读比赛、学唱英文歌曲，课前五分钟活动等。
5、注重个别辅导，在面向全体学生的基础上，培优补差。
6、不断学习，加强自身素质和业务能力的提高。
六、教学进度
第一周（9月7日—12日）Module1 Wonders of the world 第二周（9月14日—19日）Module2 Public holidays 第三周（9月21日—26日）Module3 Heroes 第四周（9月28日—10月2日）Module4 Home alone 第五周（10月4日—9日）M odule5 Museums 第六周（10月12日—16日）Module6 Problems 第七周（10月19—23日）Module1-6 Revision moduleA 第八周（10月26日—30日）期中考试 第九周（11月2日—6日）Module7 Great books 第十周（11月9日—13日）Module8 Sports life 第十一周（11月16日—20日）Module9 Great inventions 第十二周（11月23日—27日）Module10 Australia 第十三周（11月30日—12月4日）Module11 Photos 第十四周（12月14日—18日）Module12 Save our world 第十五周（12月21日—25日）Module6-12 Revision module B 第十六周（12月28日—1月1日）总复习第十六周（1月4日—8日）期末考试
总之，这一学期是关键的学期，因为它意味着学生新的知识将近结束，总的复习即将来临，作为班主任的我，一定要努力做好中考前复习的铺垫！
第2篇：外研版九年级英语上册教学计划
外研版九年级英语
上
册
教
学
计
划
金传郁 2013-9-
1一 学情分析
今年我任教九年级一二两班英语。从整体情况来看，学生普遍英语基础较差，兴趣不高，甚至有部分学生的听说读写能力还不及 小学三年级水平，所以在课堂教学时，出现有学生不守课堂规则，不愿听课、睡觉或是做与课堂无关事情的现象，难以形成英语学习氛围。也有少部分学生基础较好，自制能力较强，能认真听课，按老师要求完成各项任务。总的来说，这两个班的英语教学具有挑战性，需要耗费不少时间和精力。
二 教材分析
本校九年级英语是外研版版英语，教材编排有以下特点：
1 本书共12个模块（两个复习模块除外），每个模块有3个单元，第一单元侧重听说能力培养，第二单元为阅读写作课，第三单元为复习单元，侧重语法运用。
2 该书.要使学生受到听、说、读、写的基本技能训练，掌握最基础的语言知识和语言技能以及培养初步英语交际的能力；养成良好的外语学习习惯，掌握学习外语的基本方法；为进一步学习和运用英语打下扎实的基
3 该书主要语法是被动语态及定语从句。
三 教学安排
依据本书情况及本学期的教学时间，本学期具体安排如下：
每周上一个模块左右，期中考试前上完前6个模块，其余的模块期中考试后至期末上完。
课程安排及教学进度：
周次模块模块内容
第1周Module 1Wonders of the world
第2周Module 1andModule 2 Great books
第3周Module 2andModule 3Sporting life
第4周Module 3 and a test
第5周National holiday
第6周Module 4 Great inventions
第7周Module 5 Museums
第8周Module 6Save our world
第9周Module 6 and a test
第10周Module 7 Australia
第11周Module 8Photos
第12周Module 9 Carton stories
第13周Module 10Fitne
第14周Module 10 and a test
第15周Module 11 Population
第16周Module 12Summer in LA
第17周Module 12 and a test
第18-20周Revision for the final examination
四 教学措施
1、依据学生以上情况，要激发他们的英语学习兴趣。
2、重视课堂教学质量，逐步提高学生英语交际能力。
3、有意识培养学生的朗读、书写和作业的基本能力。
4、要因材施教 ，要进行分层次教学。对于好的学生要加大知识的容量，拓展知识的层面，使好学生成绩更上一层楼；对于差生要因势利导，因材施教，使差生在原有的基础上有所提高。
第3篇：外研版英语九年级上册单词
九年级上册单词
MODULE 1
wondern.奇迹vt.想知道,对...好奇 bandn.乐队 reviewn.评论
ancienta.远古的,古老的 compositionn.作文 graden.成绩；年级 pyramidn.金字塔 pupiln.学生 meetingn.会议 listen up注意听
callvt.叫做,名为；打电话 eventn.事件；比赛项目 naturala.天然的；自然的get out of从...内出来，离开 lighta.明亮的 n.光线;灯 replyvi.回答
clearv.散开；打扫干净 a.清晰的 risevi.升起 groundn.地面
belowprep.在…下面 edgen.边，边缘
on the edge of处于...的边缘 bottomn.底部
at the bottom of在...的底部 canyonn.峡谷 siden.边，面，侧 disappearvi.消失 distancen.距离 hugea.巨大的facev.面对，面临 n.脸 sightn.景象，景观 heightn.高度 liftn.电梯 viewn.景色 attractvt.吸引 descriptionn.描述 locationn.地点，位置
MODULE 2
workn.(常复)作品 influencevt.影响 respectvt.尊敬,尊重 thinkern.思想家 wisea.睿智的as far as就…来说；至于 not...any more不再...monthlya.每月一次的，每月的 literaturen.文学 millions of数百万的 behaviourn.行为，举止 caven.山洞,洞穴 freedomn.自由 funeraln.葬礼
outsidern.局外人，外来人 sociala.社会的 themen.主题
treasuren.宝藏，财宝 clevera.聪明的run awayv.潜逃,逃跑 deada.死的for a timeadv.暂时, 一度 pleaseda.高兴的 alivea.活着的grow up成长，长大成人 talk about谈论 southerna.南方的 staten.州，邦；状态 versionn.版本 historicala.历史的 editorn.编辑
publishern.出版者，出版社 reviewern.评论家
MODULE 3
sportinga.有关体育运动的 allowvt.允许 defeatvt.打败
seasonn.赛季；季节 stand for代表；象征
againstprep.与...相对，相反；靠，依 tougha.艰苦的；强硬的 encouragev.鼓励 medaln.奖章,奖牌
overnighta.突如其来的，持续整夜的 recordn.最高记录vt.记录
setvt.设置;制定set up建立；创立 yearbookn.年鉴 first of all首先
representvt.代表,象征 advertisementn.广告 coachn.教练
regularlyad.有规律地
sportsmann.运动员，男运动员 hurdlen.栏架 v.跨栏赛跑 hurdlingn.跨栏赛跑 sportswomann.女运动员 racevi.比赛
discuionn.讨论 awardv.授予
finishing line终点线 marathonn.马拉松 turnn.跑道
taekwondo跆拳道 beltn.带子
MODULE 4
printingn.印刷
advantagen.优点,优势 digitala.数码的digital camera数码相机 batteryn.电池 chargevt.充电
favourn.帮助；喜爱 publishvt.出版 iuen.(报刊)期
ordinarya.平常的,普通的,平凡的 agen.时期，时代；年龄 replacevt.代替 see to负责，注意 producevt.生产
inventionn.发明 look through浏览 createv.创造 cottonn.棉花 woodn.木材 at a time一次 by hand用手工 inkn.墨水
blockn.板子；街区
at the beginning of在...的开始 knowledgen.知识 spreadvt.散播，传播 introductionn.传入；介绍 rather than而不是...CD-ROM只读光盘 one day某天 feathern.羽毛
dryv.(使)干燥，使(变干)a.干的，干燥的sharpenvt.磨快，削尖 steeln.钢，钢铁
fountain pen自来水笔，钢笔 popularityn.普及，流行 ballpoint penn.圆珠笔
MODULE 5
entryn.进入；参加，登记；入口；参赛作品
photographyn.摄影 familiara.熟悉的 attentionn.注意力
pay attention to集中注意力于
upstairsad.在楼上，向楼上 n.楼上 guardn.保卫 signn.标志 as well也
downstairsad.在楼下；向楼下 sculpturen.雕像
eitheradj.两者之一的 experimentn.实验 exhibitn.展品
unusuala.不同寻常的work out设法弄懂，计算出 try out试用，试验，检验 Launch Pad起飞坪；发射台 Physicsn.物理 fallinga.下降中的 sandn.沙子 truckn.卡车 wheeln.轮子 positionn.位置 rocketn.火箭
travelvi.旅行 n.旅行 humann.人类 a.人类的 speedn.速度 obeyv.遵守 above all首先 drop in顺便走访 as...as同…一样
communicationn.交流，沟通 courtn.球场 storev.储存
cloakroomn.衣帽间 toiletn.厕所
inventorn.发明家 cafen.咖啡厅
MODULE 6
wasten.浪费 v.浪费 wastefula.浪费的throw away扔掉，抛弃 metaln.金属 energyn.能量 pollutionn.污染
recyclevt.循环，再生，再利用readern.读者
environmentala.环境的 reusablea.可重新使用的 hopelea.希望渺茫的 reducevt.减少,减小 reusevt.重新利用 necearya.有必要的 plastica.塑料制的 n.塑料
repairev.修复 chinan.陶瓷
carev.在意，关心；担心 fashionn.风尚 insteadprep.代替
instead of代替, 而不是… air conditioningn.空调 clothn.布 sortv.挑拣 harmn.伤害
do harm to对...造成伤害 differencen.差别，差异
make a difference to对...产生重大影响/很重要
productn.产品 materialn.材料 bottlen.瓶子
boilv.煮沸，烧开 wildlifen.野生动植物
REVISION MODULE A accidentn.事故 put up张贴，挂起
joinvt.参加；连接；加入 networkn.网络
businepeoplen.商人 scientifica.科学的 multimedian.多媒体 hardwaren.硬件
communicatev.交流，沟通 softwaren.软件
(be)made up of组成，构成 a number of许多
normala.常规的；正常的 snailn.蜗牛
MODULE 7
crocodilen.鳄鱼
sharkn.鲨鱼 handn.协助；手
have a look at看...一眼
alongsideprep.在…的旁边，沿着… detailn.细节 grapen.葡萄 hamn.火腿 lambn.小羊肉 outbackn.内陆
relativen.家人，亲戚 sheepn.绵羊
spiritn.灵魂；神灵 surfingn.冲浪 winen.(葡萄)酒 helicoptern.直升机 purplen.紫色a.紫色的 similara.相似的,类似的 similar to同...相似 ourspron.我们的 cricketn.板球(运动)rugbyn.橄榄球 sunshinen.阳光
expreionn.短语，表达方式 maten.同伴 tempern.脾气
lifestylen.生活方式 water sports水上运动 greyn./a.灰色(的)ancestorn.祖先，先人
MODULE 8
on the left在左边 on the right在右边 troublen.麻烦 shotn.照片 kidv.开玩笑 expectv.盼望 pick up接；拣起
historica.有历史意义的 even though即使 sizen.规模
beautyn.美丽
categoryn.类别，种类 movementn.运动，动作 featuren.以...为特点 includevt.包括
richa.富有的；丰富的 congratulationn.祝贺 photographern.摄影师 presentvt.授予 n.礼物 ceremonyn.典礼
frightenedadj.吓坏的MODULE 9
cartoonn.卡通
flashn.闪光；闪光灯 drawingn.图画 over there那边 wordn.言语
have a word with和某人说几句话 cuteadj.逗人喜爱的,漂亮的 heavenn.天堂，天国 lovablea.可爱的 men.混乱；杂乱 monstern.怪物
privatea.私人的；秘密的 heartn.心脏,心
win the heart of赢得...的心
everywheread.在各个地方；处处 handbagn.手提包
favouriten.喜爱的东西(或人)a.特别喜欢的leadv.领导 rulen.统治 peachn.桃子
commona.常用的 bon.老板，雇主 surfacen.表面
ever since从...开始
Belgiana.比利时的 n.比利时人 cartoonistn.漫画家，卡通画家 seriesn.系列
experiencev.&n.经历，体验 creatorn.创造者 latea.逝世的；迟的 singlea.单一的MODULE 10 fitnen.健康 achev.&n.疼，痛 exercisen.锻炼，练习runningn.跑步 weightn.重量 weight lifting举重 give up放弃
unlikelya.不太可能的 bumpv.碰，撞击 bump intov.碰见
interestv.感兴趣 n.兴趣 junk food垃圾食品 sugarn.糖
tastya.美味的，好吃的 menun.菜单 chipn.薯条 behavev.表现
pastan.意大利面食 persuadevt.说服 cookingn.烹饪 banvt.禁止 educatevt.教育 typicala.典型的 disadvantagen.缺点 dietn.日常饮食
advertisev.做广告，登广告
MODULE 11
populationn.人口 crowdn.人群 increasev.增加
smoken.烟，烟雾 v.吸烟 increasinga.增长的 along with与…一起
minuten.分钟
percentn.百分之一 appointmentn.约会 thanks to由于 crimen.犯罪 flatn.(英)公寓 lawn.法律 rubbishn.垃圾
suburbn.城郊住宅区 taxn.税
visionn.景象，幻影 addv.增加
add to向...增加 faultn.错误 policen.警察
curev.治愈，治好，治疗
MODULE 12
accommodationn.住处 shortsn.短裤
sunglaesn.太阳镜 trousersn.裤子 guestn.客人 coursen.课程 hostn.主人
paagen.一段，一节 well-trained训练有素的 experiencedadj.经验丰富的 progren.进步
make progre取得进步 arrangev.安排 variousa.不同的 organizevt.组织
place of interest旅游胜地 fill in填写
applicationn.申请 formn.表格 addren.地址 lengthn.长度
bookn.书 vt.预定
check in(在旅馆)登记入住；(在机场)办理登机手续
REVISION MODULE B jacketn.夹克
stationn.(澳大利亚或新西兰的)大牧场 woodena.木制的 extraa.额外的contactvt.接触,与…联系
第4篇：九年级外研版英语上册课文原文
九年级英语上册课文原文
Module 1Unit 1 Listen and read.Betty: OK, come in and sit down!Daming: What's happening? Lingling: We're having a meeting.Daming: That's news to me!I'm doing my homework.What's it about? Lingling: The school magazine.Daming: What school magazine? Betty: Right, listen up, everyone.Did anyone watch television yesterday evening? Did you see the interview with Becky Wang? Lingling: She sings with the band Crazy Feet.She's my favourite singer.Tony: Yes, I saw it.She went to our school!Betty: Well, she started a school magazine called New Standard when she was a pupil here.So why don't we start a school magazine, too? I've written down some ideas.We'll write a diary of school events, and tell everyone about the school concert and the dance club.Tony: And school basketball matches.Lingling: But who will write the articles? Betty: We'll write the articles.Any more ideas? Tony: I know!I'll do some reviews about our favourite bands and movies!Lingling: And I'll do an interview with Becky Wang!Betty: Brilliant!Anyone else? Daming: How about "Homework Help"? Tony: Yes, some ideas on how to get good grades!Lingling: What's your homework, Daming? Daming: I'm writing a composition called "What is a wonder of the world?" I'm reading about the ancient pyramids in Egypt.Betty: "Homework Help".I think that's a fantastic idea, Daming.Module 1 Unit 2 Read the paage and describe what you can see in the photo.Use some of the following words.ancient;deep;high;long;modern;natural;tall;wide
The Greatest Wonder of the Natural World When I arrived, it was early morning and it was raining.I got out of the car, went through a gate and walked along a path.In the east, the sky was becoming light, but beside the path, it was still very dark.I knew it was there, but there was nothing to see.After about a kilometre, a stranger appeared in front of me."Am I going the right way?" I asked.He knew where I was going."Yes," he replied, "you'll get there in five minutes." Finally, I came to some rocks, and stopped.I looked carefully over them, but it was still too dark to see anything.Suddenly, the clouds cleared and the rain stopped.The sun rose behind me and beyond the rocks.I saw that the ground fell away and down to a river, far below me.I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon, one of the wonders of the natural world.I looked down to the Colorado River about 2 kilometres below me.If you put the three tallest buildings in the world at the bottom of the canyon, they still won't reach the top.Then I looked acro to the other side of the canyon.How far is it? It's 20 kilometres, maybe more.Finally, I looked to my left and to my right, and on both sides the canyon disappeared into the distance...over 400 kilometres long.The Grand Canyon is not just big.It's huge!That morning on the edge of the canyon, I asked myself a question.It's not "How deep is it?" or "How wide is it?" or "How long is it?" but "Is the Grand Canyon the greatest wonder anywhere in the natural world?" I know the answer.But what do you think? Module 2 Unit 1 Listen and read.Mr Jackson: Hello, Betty.What's up? What are you doing in the library? I was looking for some old copies of the school magazine.If I've got it Betty: right, it was called New Standard.That's right.As far as I remember, it was started by Becky Wang.We don't Mr Jackson: have a school magazine any more.It's a pity.Betty: Well, I'm thinking about starting it again.Mr Jackson: Sounds like a good idea!Go on.Betty: I was also looking for something by Confucius and by Shakespeare.Mr Jackson: Really? That's a bit difficult for the school magazine.Well, I'd like a monthly article called "Great Books"—you know, someone Betty: reads a favourite work of literature and writes an article about it.I see.Confucius' works are still read by many people today, and we're still influenced by his thoughts.And Shakespeare's plays are seen by millions of people every year.But how about an American writer, Mark Twain, for Mr Jackson: example? I don't know.Mark Twain was an important writer, but he isn't known as a Betty: great thinker like Confucius.No, but his books are still popular.In fact, he wrote my favourite book The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.Perhaps that's what makes "Great Mr Jackson: Books"—they're still read today.Betty: So why don't you write the first article on "Great Books"? Module 2 Unit 2 Read the paage and check your answers to the following questions.1.What did Betty suggest at the end of the conversation in Unit 1? 2.What book did Mr Jackson choose? 3.What do you think happens in the book? 4.What do you think are the main ideas of the book? Great Books
The Adventures of Tom Sawyer
Here is our monthly article on a favourite great book.This month, our guest writer is Mr Jackson.My favourite great book is The Adventures of Tom Sawyer by Mark Twain.Tom lives with his aunt Polly in the quiet streets of St Petersburg, Miouri.He's a lively and clever young boy, and he finds himself in many exciting adventures.He runs away with his two friends, Huck Finn and Joe, to an island in the middle of the Miiippi River for several days.With Huck he goes looking for treasure, with Becky he gets lost in a cave, and finally, they find a box of gold.My favourite scene in the book is when everyone thinks Tom is dead.He decides to go to his own funeral.He hides and watches for a time, and then suddenly he appears.Everyone is surprised to see him but they're also pleased to see him alive.Tom is the hero of the story, but there are other important characters.Huck is an outsider and everyone is afraid of him.Becky is pretty with fair hair, Joe is Tom's best friend, and Injun Joe is the bad man of the story.The theme of the story are to do with children growing up and becoming more serious.It describes how strangers are seen in small towns of America.Finally, it talks about freedom, social rules and how people are punished for bad behaviour.Why do I think Tom Sawyer is a great book? Mark Twain wrote the story in 1876, but it's still read and loved by people all over the world today.And although it's only a story, Twain wrote it in the everyday English of the southern states of America in the 19th century, so it sounds very real.Today it's thought to be one of the greatest books in American literature.Go on—read it!I know you'll enjoy it, too.Module 3 Unit 1 Listen and read.Lingling: Hi, Tony.You look tired.Yes.I'm training with BIG, the Beijing International Globetrotters, for the Tony: School's Basketball competition.It's the big match next week.Betty: Who's it against? Daming: HAS.Lingling: What does HAS stand for? Tony: Haidian All Stars.Betty: Oh, yes.You were defeated last time.Lingling: What was the score? Betty: All Stars 98 points to Globetrotters 52.So when will the match be held? Daming: Next Saturday.Are you coming? Yes.It's going to be a tough match.I'm going to write a report for New Betty: Standard.Lingling: I agree.Are you in the team, Daming? Daming: No, I wasn't chosen this time.Why are you smiling, Betty? Well, I've seen HAS play several times this season, and they're brilliant!Betty: And if you want my opinion...Tony: No, I don't...Betty:...you've got no chance!What do you reckon, Lingling? Lingling: I think you're right, Betty.Daming: Well, you won't be allowed to watch with our fans if that's what you think!Betty: It's true, Daming.Well, I don't agree.We're playing really well this season.I think we're so Tony: good that we'll be asked to play in the Olympic Games.Don't let them get to you, Tony!Daming:(They leave)Lingling: Hee hee!Nice work, Betty!Of course.They're so mad with us that they'll try harder to win, just to show Betty: we're wrong!Module 3 Unit 2 Read the paage and choose the sentence which best exprees the main idea.Liu Xiang—Trained for Gold
Sports Yearbook 2004 For Liu Xiang, life as a sporting hero has just begun.First of all, he'll be invited to competitions around the world.He'll be chosen to represent China at the Olympic Games.He's a symbol of China's international sporting succe.And now that he's well known all over the world, Liu Xiang will also be asked to appear in advertisements and films, and even to record music.But his coach Sun Haiping is making sure that he trains regularly.Liu Xiang will be advised by his coach on how to be a great sportsman, and by his manager on how to be a star.Liu Xiang is not an overnight succe.He was born in Shanghai on 13th July, 1983 and, like many Olympic sports stars, he started training when he was very young.In Grade Four, he went to the Junior Sports School of Putuo District of Shanghai.Liu was encouraged at first to train as a high jumper.Then, in 1998, his skill at hurdling was noticed by his coach Sun Haiping.Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.It was set up in 2001 to help young sportsmen and sportswomen.Liu's races were recorded, and his performance was compared with the world's best sports stars.Sun Haiping used the information to change Liu's training programme.In 2002 he won his first international 110m hurdles event in Switzerland, and in the same year, a gold medal at the Asian Games in Korea.In 2004, Liu won the first Olympic gold medal in the same event for China in Athens, Greece.So what's next for Liu Xiang? Has he found out that there's more to life than training? Will he be encouraged to spend more time away from sport? No, Liu Xiang will go for more medals for China because he was trained for gold!Liu Xiang ____.was helped by his sports school to become a gold medal winner has trained for many years, and will continue to win medals will be encouraged to be a star and not a sporting hero
Module 4 Unit 1 Listen and read.Tony: Dad, can I ask a favour? Can I borrow your digital camera? Tony's dad: Why? Tony: I'd like to take some photos on the school visit to the museum next week.Tony's dad: Is this for your school magazine? Has it been published yet? Yes, two iues have been published.But it's going to be an online magazine Tony: from now on.Tony's dad: What's wrong with an ordinary magazine? Do you mean using paper? It's too expensive.If the magazine is online, paper won't be needed.That's an important advantage.It'll be published on the Tony: school website, and it can be read on screen.Well, that makes me think.Paper and printing have been used for ages.We once got information from books, but now the same information can be read Tony's dad: or even listened to on computers.I wonder...Can books be replaced by computers? Maybe I'll write something Tony: for the magazine!Anyway, about the camera...? Here it is.The battery hasn't been charged for a couple of months.It's Tony's dad: been turned off since your mum's birthday party.Tony: It doesn't matter.I'll see to that.But you must promise that it won't be lent to anyone, and it won't be left Tony's dad: at school!Just look after it.Is that clear? Tony: Promise!Module 4 Unit 2 Read the paage and match the main ideas with the paragraphs.a.The world before books b.The invention of printing c.Life on paper and in print d.Technology and books e.Can books be replaced by computers? Paragraph 1 matches c. Paragraph 2 matches a. Paragraph 3 matches b. Paragraph 4 matches d. Paragraph 5 matches e.Can Books Be Replaced by computers?
by Tony Smith Every morning my father buys a newspaper on his way to work.Every day I open my books in cla and start my leons.Every evening my mother looks through magazines at home.And every night, I look at the posters with photos of David Beckham and Yao Ming on my bedroom wall before I go to sleep.Can we imagine life without paper or print? Paper was first created about 2,000 years ago, and has been made from silk, cotton, bamboo, and, since the 19th century, from wood.People learned to write words on paper to make a book.But in those days, books could only be produced one at a time by hand.As a result, they were expensive and rare.And because there weren't many books, few people learned to read.Then printing was invented in China.The first printed books were made by putting ink on a wooden block and holding the paper against it.When printing was developed greatly at the beginning of the 11th century, books could be produced more quickly and cheaply.As a result, more people learned to read.After that, knowledge and ideas spread quickly, in a way that can be compared with the introduction of the Internet in the 20th century.But will books be needed in the future? Today information can be received online, downloaded from the Internet rather than found in books, and information can be kept on CD-ROMs or machines such as MP3 players.These machines are smaller and lighter than books so that they can be carried very easily.computers are already used in clarooms, and newspapers and magazines can already be read online.So will books be replaced by computers one day? No, I don't think the Yao Ming poster on my bedroom wall will ever be replaced by a computer two metres high!Module 5 Unit 1 Listen and read.Betty: Let's go to the Science and Technology room.It's upstairs.Daming: come on!This way!I'm looking forward to this!Guard: Shh!No shouting!It's against the rules.Daming: But I want to go upstairs before we have to go home.Guard: Hang on a minute!You mustn't go up there!come back!Daming: What's the matter? Guard: Look at the sign—"No entry".Daming: Oh!Why? Guard: It's closed until January.And the Natural History room as well.Oh dear.My clamates and I have got to write a report for homework by Friday.Tony: Well, let's go downstairs.Lingling: Why? Tony: I want to buy some postcards in the shop.Where's Daming? Lingling: I don't know.He's gone off on his own.Tony: Look at this amazing sculpture.Guard: Don't touch!You mustn't touch it.Tony: Sorry.I'll just take a photo.Guard: No, you can't take a photo, either.Look at the sign—"No photography".I'm sorry.I wasn't paying attention to what you were saying.I was looking Tony: at the sculpture.It looks very real.Lingling: Hurry up!You're taking so long.Let's go.Where's Daming? Tony: It looks very strange.It's kind of familiar!It looks like...Daming: Waaaargh!Tony:...Daming!Betty: Oh, very funny!No wonder it looks real.Lingling: It's not a sculpture.It's Daming!Module 5 Unit 2 Read the paage and answer the questions.1.In what way is the Science Museum different from other museums? 2.Where does Tony go when he visits the Science Museum? 3.What else is there to see in the Science Museum?
%
The Science Museum in London
by Tony Smith The most unusual museum in London is the Science Museum.In most museums, there's no shouting and no running, and you aren't allowed to touch the exhibits.But the Science Museum is different...because it's noisy!People talk about what they can see and do there, and some of the machines are noisy as well.Visiting the Science Museum is fun and it's a great way to learn about science because you can work things out and try out ideas.When I visit the Science Museum, I go to the Launch Pad.This is my favourite room because you can do physics experiments.For example, if you want to fill a bag with falling sand, you have to move a kind of truck on wheels into the correct position.I also go to the Rocket Show.You can learn how we travel into space and back again.Then I go upstairs to the Human and Nature room.You can compare your speed with animals there.You hear a noise and push a button.If you aren't fast enough, the lion catches you!I'm faster than all my friends, but the lion still catches me.There are also rooms on transport, the environment and space technology, as well as maths, physics and chemistry.You can do a lot of things in this museum, but you have to obey some rules as well.For example, you mustn't take photos of the exhibits in the museum.But you can buy postcards of them in the museum shops.Above all, the Science Museum is free.That means you can drop in for a few minutes or you can stay as long as you like—it's open every day, from 10 a.m.to 6 p.m.So if you ever go to London, make sure you visit the Science Museum.It's my favourite museum in the whole world.Module 6 Unit 1 Listen and read.Hey, you guys!Gue what!We've just got an email from a reader of our New Betty: Standard!Lingling: Great!What does it say? It's from Zhao Ming.He says, "I saw your enjoyable online magazine while I Betty: was doing my homework on favourite books." Daming: He read Mr Jackson's article!He says, "When are you going to write about environmental education? I'm at Betty: a green school in Dalian..." Daming: What's a green school? "...and everyone agrees we must be careful about the environment.In fact, there are thousands of green schools in China.It's wasteful to throw away gla, paper and metal, so every cla collects reusable waste, sells it for Betty: recycling..." Tony: Nice idea!"...and raises money to help students in poor areas.But it's not just at Betty: school, it's also at home that we save energy and recycle..." Daming: Such as...? "...such as turning lights off, so we don't waste electricity." And he finishes, "I'm hopeful that if everyone thinks about pollution and recycling, Betty: we can protect the air and the oceans, and help save our world.If we don't, the future is hopele." Tony: Let's ask Zhao Ming to write something.Module 6 Unit 2 Read the paage and answer the questions in the first paragraph.How to be green
by Zhao Ming How green are you? Do you care about protecting the environment and saving energy? Try these questions and see. Do you try to walk or ride a bike to school? Do you buy new clothes just because they are the latest fashions? Do you open a window instead of turning on air conditioning? Do you buy things produced locally instead of made abroad? Do you take your own cloth bag when shopping instead of using plastic bags? Do you sort the waste before throwing it away? We all need a healthy environment, but we produce waste every day and it does harm to our environment.Though we are young, we can still do something to help.In fact, even the simplest everyday activities can make a real difference to the environment.Here are some ideas for you.Remember these three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Reduce Reduce means "use le".Don't waste things.This saves money and reduces pollution and waste going into the environment.Before we buy something new, think whether it is really neceary—or maybe the old one will be just as good!When we do buy things, choose local products if poible, and try not to buy too many things from abroad.Reuse Reuse means "use again".Use things for as long as poible.When we buy things, make sure that they last a long time.We should look after them so that they will last, and we should repair them if we can instead of throwing them away and buying new ones.Don't use a paper cup or a paper bag.It's better to use a china cup and a lunch box because you can use them again.Recycle Recycle means "change things into something else".Although it takes energy to change something into something else, it's better than throwing things away or burning them.Find out what can be recycled in your neighbourhood and take part in recycling programmes.We should also buy products made from recycled materials, such as recycled paper, to help save trees.Module 7 Unit 1 Listen and read.Tony's dad: Hi, Tony.What are you up to? Tony: I'm looking for the photos that you took in Australia.Tony's dad: OK, would you like a hand to find them? Great!Thanks.We're doing a project about countries that we want to visit, and I'm going to write about Australia.I have to imagine that I've been Tony: there, and that I'm writing a letter to Mum and you.Tony's dad: Well, have a look at these.Tony: Let's see.Hey!What's that? It's called Uluru.It's a huge rock in the centre of Australia.It's Tony's dad: fantastic.Tony: And this building? That's the Sydney Opera House.It's like a huge sailing boat with water on three sides.And this one is a photo of a shark that I saw on the Great Barrier Tony's dad: Reef.Tony: Wow!It's amazing!Did you see any kangaroos or crocodiles? There were kangaroos that were jumping alongside the car on our way back Tony's dad: from Uluru.But no crocodiles.Tony: They're great photos.By the way, can I borrow the camera again? Tony's dad: Why? Well, there's a photo competition that I want to win!I want to take some Tony: photos at our school dance next week.I bet you do!OK, you can borrow it, but only once you've done your project Tony's dad: on Australia.Module 7 Unit 2 Read the letter and find what the photos show.Thursday Dear Mum and Dad, I'm writing this letter to you from the centre of Australia.At the moment we're staying near Uluru—that's the Aboriginal name for Ayers Rock.On the first day, we took a helicopter tour over the rock, and I was surprised at how big it was: 3.6 kilometres long and 348 metres high.The colours of the rock are fantastic, and at different times of the day, they change from purple to red.The Aborigines are the first people of Australia, and the ancient Aboriginal stories describe the spirits that created the world.Uluru is a centre of Aboriginal culture.The Australians have many British relatives and they're like us in many ways.Their family life is similar to ours, and they enjoy the same food and hobbies.The food and drink that most Australians like are grapes, lamb, ham and especially wine that they make in the south of the country.They love all sports, but the games that they love the most are football, cricket and rugby.Because most Australians live near the coast, they love going to the beach, swimming and surfing.Although it's December, it's summer over here.The sunshine is very bright, and near the coast the countryside is very green.There are lots of sheep in the fields and on the hills, but the outback is more like a desert, full of rocks and sand.Most Australians speak English, although they have some special expreions such as "Good day!" and "No worries, mate." They mean "Hello!" and "Don't worry about it.It's not a problem!" The next day after we arrived at Uluru, we went on a camel ride.The camel that I rode had a bad temper, and I got very tired.Everyone else thought it was very funny that my camel kept lying down...Finally, later this evening, we're taking the plane back to Sydney and coming home.It's been a fantastic trip!Love, Tony Module 8 Unit 1 Listen and read.Lingling: There are a lot of people here!Well, everyone wants to come to the school dance.The trouble is, I want Tony: to get some good photos, but I can't see over people's heads.Daming: Are you going to enter the photo competition? Tony: You bet!By the way, is that He Zhong at the front? What's he doing here? Betty: Same as you!Daming: Who's He Zhong? Tony: He's the photographer who won the photo competition last time!Daming: The one who won the photo competition last summer? Tony: That's right.Lingling: Shh!It's the Blues Boys playing!It's the band which gets everyone dancing.Tony: Those drums are really loud!Maybe I'll go upstairs.OK, but look after your camera!Betty:(Later...)
Betty: Hi, Tony.How did you get on? Fine.I got some great shots of the boy who plays the guitar on the left.Tony: Where is He Zhong? Betty: He left early.There was something wrong with his camera.Tony: Great!Now I'm in with a chance to win!Lingling: But, Tony...where's your camera? Tony: It's here, in my bag.Oh no, it's gone!Betty: You're kidding!Tony: But I had it a minute ago.Perhaps I left it upstairs...Betty: He's quite unhappy.Lingling: His father is the person who will be most unhappy.Tony's dad: Hi, everyone!Betty: Oh!Mr Smith!Help!I mean...hello!Tony? Er, we didn't expect to see you!Tony's dad: I've just come to pick Tony up.Did he try out my camera? Module 8 Unit 2 Read the paage.Results of Student Photo competition We were very pleased with the photo competition.compared with other years, we received many more photos.Even though all of the photos are excellent, we can't give prizes to everyone.There are four prizes, so read on to find out who the winners are.The person who won the prize for the Most Beautiful Nature photography is fifteen-year-old Li Wei.Li took photos of the mountains in Xiangshan Park.The park isn't far from his home, about 500 metres, and he knows it very well.The photo which we liked best in the Historic China group was taken by Zhao Min.Zhao is only 12 years old.Her photo is of Tian'anmen Square, the largest public square in the world.It's 880 metres from north to south and 500 metres wide at the northern end.Her photo shows the size and beauty of the square perfectly.The best photo in the Music category was taken by He Zhong.His photo of this year's best band Crazy Feet shows the singer, Becky Wang, and the band playing at a concert in Shenzhen.He Zhong manages to show the movement and the sounds of this great new band, and the fun which their fans are having.A collection of photos called "The Many Faces of Our City" which features Beijing won the prize for the Most Unusual category.Three pupils at the same school worked on this entry.It includes photos of different parts of the city, old and new.It succefully shows the rich culture which makes Beijing so famous.Congratulations to our winners and thanks to everyone who entered the competition.We are very lucky that the famous photographer John William is in China to talk about his new book.He has agreed to present the prizes at the prize giving ceremony at the end of this month.Module 9 Unit 1 Listen and read.Daming: Oh dear!Where's the camera? What's Tony's dad going to say? Betty: This is like a cartoon story.Lingling: Why? I can imagine every drawing in the cartoon, and I know what the ending will Betty: be.Daming: The cartoons I like have lots of jokes.Lingling: But it's no laughing matter.This is serious.Betty: This isn't one of those cartoons which make you laugh.Daming: And the characters I like are heroes like Superman or Batman.Lingling: We need someone like Superman who can save Tony...Mr Jackson: Hello, I'm looking for Tony.Daming: He's over there!Could you tell him I'd like to have a word with him? I've got a camera which Mr Jackson: has got his name on it.It was upstairs.Daming: That's good news.Shall I give it to him? Mr Jackson: OK.Here you are.Betty: Oh, Tony's dad is going over to speak to him.If Tony tells his dad that he's lost the camera he borrowed, he'll be in Daming: deep trouble.Lingling: How can we let Tony know that we've got his dad's camera? Daming: I know!Let's take a photo.He'll see the flash.Betty: That's a smart idea!Give it to me!Well, it may not be very funny, but perhaps it'll be a cartoon which has Lingling: a happy ending.And I'll be Superman!Betty:(Snap.)
Module 9 Unit 2 Read the paage and match the words or phrases in the box with the cartoons.cute;emperor;fan club;heaven;lovable;me;monster;private
Cartoon Heroes Nemo, a cute orange-and-white fish, and Shrek, a huge green monster have won the hearts of young people in China and all over the world.The heroes of popular cartoons are everywhere, on office desks, handbags, and computer screens.But there are some cartoon favourites which are older.The cartoon of the Monkey King has just had its "40th birthday".Called Havoc in Heaven, it tells the story of a monkey who leads a group of monkeys against the rule of the Emperor in heaven.He flies into a peach garden and eats as many peaches as he likes.He makes a me in each room in heaven.But it is above all the jokes played by the monkey that people remember."Havoc in heaven" has become a common expreion used by a parent or a bo when they return to the house or office and see a me.Another favourite who has celebrated an important birthday in China is a reporter with red hair and a small white dog.Tintin has travelled to the jungles, the backstreets of Shanghai and even the surface of the moon.Tintin has been popular for 75 years, ever since Belgian cartoonist Hergé invented the character in 1929.His books have been translated into more than 50 languages, and about 200 million copies have been sold.In December 1984 the whole series of Tintin began to be published in China.Many Chinese still keep collections of these black-and-white Tintin books.There are several fan clubs in China which have held birthday parties for Tintin in Beijing, Shanghai, Guangzhou, Nanjing and Wuhan.Finally, Snoopy, Charlie Brown's lovable dog who lives in his own private dream world, also has his "50th birthday" celebrated by China's Snoopy fans in 2000."I didn't draw the cartoons only for children.Adults who have experienced life understand them better," said the late Charles Schultz, creator of Snoopy and the Peanuts cartoons.Module 10 Unit 1 Listen and read.Lingling: How was your basketball training? Tony: It was OK, but I'm a bit tired.My legs ache a bit.Lingling: Don't give up if you want to stay fit.You're lucky you're only playing in the school team!I've got a friend whose brother is training for the Olympics.There's a boy in our team whose parents want him to go to a sports school.Daming: But he's not fit or strong enough.Lingling: He'll need to take a lot of exercise—go running or do weight training.Daming: So what happened about the camera, Tony? Don't talk to me about that!I think my dad gueed that I nearly lost it at Tony: the school dance.I'm not allowed to use it any more.But we need some photos of the next basketball match.Are you going to buy Daming: a camera? Unlikely!It's my father who gives me my pocket money, and he's the person Tony: whose camera I nearly lost.Hi, everyone.Gue what!I've just bumped into the head teacher.He said he Betty: wanted to see me.Daming: What's up? Betty: He wants to talk about New Standard.Daming: Ask him if he wants to write something about staying healthy.Betty: He doesn't look like someone whose fitne and health interest him very much!Daming: Good luck, Betty.Module 10 Unit 2 Read the paage and match the headings with the paragraphs.a.What is healthy food? b.Getting things done c.What's on the menu? d.Improving school meals
Feed Me Better Jamie Oliver is a young cook who wants to improve school dinners.In 2005 he went back to school to see what the children were eating.What's on the menu?
Jamie asked the children what their meals were like."We have hamburgers and chips, or pizza," they told him, "and sometimes here is fruit, but we prefer ice cream." Jamie thought the menu was terrible.The children were eating junk food, and it was problem.Junk food isn't just bad for the body.Children whose midday meals were unhealthy were difficult to teach in he afternoon.Teachers said that children behaved very badly after lunch.Improving school meals
When Jamie took vegetables into cla, the children didn't know what they were.Jamie realised that the children didn't know about healthy food.Then he talked to the people who worked in the kitchens.He found out that they didn't know enough about food and health, and they didn't have very much money to spend.What is healthy food?
He decided to teach the cooks and the children about healthy food.It was hard work!He cooked healthy meals for them including meat, rice, pasta and vegetables, but a lot of the teenagers refused to eat the new food.Jamie showed them why the junk food wasn't healthy.In the end, when Jamie persuaded them to try his cooking, they liked it!Getting things done
Jamie talked to the government.He told them they needed to ban junk food from schools, train the cooks, educate the children and pend more money on school dinners.A lot of parents, teachers and children agreed with him.The newspapers wrote articles about him, and a TV programme showed his visits to the school.Jamie is a cook whose ideas are changing school dinners all over Britain.Module 11 Unit 1 Listen and read.Tony: So what's next for New Standard? Daming: How about another "Homework Help"? Tony: What's this week's homework? Population.There are too many people and there is not enough space, and there Lingling: is too much traffic, noise and pollution.Daming: Well, we're in the right place to talk about it.Beijing is a big city.That's right, although Chongqing is the biggest city in China.But an Lingling: increasing population is an environmental problem in many countries.Along with the crowds, the smoke, and the transport problems.Let's look up Tony: some facts...Ah, how about this? Every minute 259 babies are born.Lingling: That makes 136,130,400 babies every year.Tony: And the population of China is about one billion, three hundred million......about 20 percent of the world's population.Lingling:(Betty is coming toward them...)Tony: Hi, Betty.How was your appointment with the head teacher? Hi!It was OK.You know the school prize-giving's coming up next week, with Betty: the usual form prizes, the basketball competition...Daming: And the photo competition......and a special prize for New Standard, the best new school magazine in Betty: Beijing.Daming: That's thanks to my "Homework Help".Betty: And gue who's going to present the prizes? Daming: No idea!Becky Wang, the singer with Crazy Feet, and the person who started New Betty: Standard!Tony: I don't believe it!Module 11 Unit 2 Read the paage.Visions of the City Jo is 15 and lives in Parkville.When Jo's grandparents first came to Parkville 50 years ago, it was a quiet country village in the centre of the country.At that time, they had a small house on the edge of town, with some fields and the hills in the distance.But Parkville was close to a big city, Arnwick, with about 200,000 people.People from the countryside began to arrive in Arnwick to find jobs and have a better life.And of course they needed somewhere to live.However, it was expensive to live in the centre of Arnwick, so the city government decided to build flats around the edge of the city.And soon, Parkville became a suburb of Arnwick.It now has over a million people.Jo's family live in one of those new flats—there's no room for small houses any more.The small local school in Parkville closed down five years ago.Jo goes to a school close to the centre of Arnwick, with 2,000 pupils.No one knows all their names.It takes Jo an hour to get to school, and this adds to the traffic and pollution.But it's not her fault.She liked her old school.Arnwick needs larger hospitals and more doctors, better public transport and fewer private cars.There need to be shops and offices.It also needs clean water and no rubbish in the streets.It's difficult to run a big city, and to protect people from crime.So it also needs more laws and more police, and more taxes to pay for everything.Well, what do you think of all this? Do you like the things which are happening in Parkville? In fact, "Visions of the city" is just a story.But does your town have the same problems as Arnwick? Module 12 Unit 1 Listen and read.Lingling: Are you OK, Betty? Your hair looks nice!And you look smart, Daming.Daming: My new trousers are a bit tight...Tony: Everyone is watching us.The whole cla is just behind us.Ladies and gentlemen, welcome to our school prize-giving.Our special guest is the singer with Crazy Feet.The group is very popular—everyone in my family is a huge fan!Please give a warm welcome to Becky Wang!Head teacher:(Applause)I'm pleased to present the prizes today.As a pupil, my time here was very important...(Later)...so finally, the New Standard team gets the special prize.You're flying...to Los Angeles!(Cheers)Your travel is free, your accommodation is with American families, and your pocket money is 100 dollars each.Lingling and Daming are doing an English course.It starts on 1st August and your host family is meeting Becky Wang: you at the airport.Tony:(whisper)What about us? We speak English already!Lingling: Shh!And Betty and Tony, the good news is...you're coming to watch Crazy Feet Becky Wang: record its latest CD.We start work in the studio on 3rd August.But I haven't got anything to wear!And my jeans are too small.My Tony: sunglaes are very old.Betty: Don't be silly, Tony!It's a wonderful prize!Becky Wang: Thank you very much.It's been wonderful to be here.Module 12 Unit 2 Read the paage and choose the best answer.Learn English in Los Angeles We provide summer English courses which are the best you can find.You will enjoy coming to Los Angeles to learn about American culture and improve your English at the same time.The courses last for four, six or eight weeks.They start at the beginning of July and August.Our teachers are well-trained and very experienced.They teach English claes for four hours a day.You can choose between small groups of two or three, or larger groups of up to 15.We provide weekly tests to see the progre you're making with your language skills of reading, writing, speaking and listening.We also provide books and other materials.As well as learning English, we want you to experience life in the USA.You live with an American family, and you take part in American life.You have meals with an American family and do some activities with them, too.For many of our students this is the most interesting part of the course.Many families create friendships with the students which last a long time.Of course, if you prefer, we can arrange hotel accommodation.Of course, there are many things to do in Los Angeles.Every day we have activities which take place after cla.You can choose to take trips to Hollywood, Disneyland or the famous beaches around LA.You can also go to various shopping centers, sports centers, movies and concerts.There are also weekend visits organized to San Francisco and other places of interest in California.We try to give our students the best poible experience of English and life in the USA.Just ask our students!They say our summer English Courses are fantastic!We hope that you'll enjoy a course with us, too.If you're interested, please fill in our application form where you will also find our list of prices.The course must be paid for one month before it begins.The paage is a(n)____.newspaper article about language courses description of an English course(T)guide to Los Angeles description of life in Los Angeles
第5篇： 外研版九年级上册单词表Microsoft Word 文档
Module1Module 2
1.军队，陆军1.联合国（英国）
2.人造的2.创建
3.大自然的3.旗帜，旗
4.奇迹，奇观4.假期，假日
5.讨论，商讨5.去度假
6.在东边的，来自东边的6.季节，节期
7.虽然，尽管7.一…就…
8.（声音）响亮的8.第四
9.主张，看法
10.按照某人的观点
11.电
12.天空
13.灰色的，阴沉的14.小路
15.在…..旁边，在…附近
16.回答，回复
17.寂静的18.迹象，标志
19.照耀
20.在下面，在….下面
21.突然向下倾斜
22.银灰色的，银质的23.小溪，小河
24.几乎，差不多
25.峡谷
26.逗留，留下
Module 3
1.出席
2.在国外，到国外
3.不管怎么样
4.惊人的，极好的5.意志，决心
6.获胜
7.胜利
8.加拿大人的9.手术
10.生病的11.军人
12.为…..而死
13.受伤的14.战争
15.了解，意识到
16.照顾，护理9.第六 10.第七 11.第八 12.第九 13.第十 14.第十二 15.第二十 16.在…..之中 17.演说，讲演 18.开拓者，先驱者 19.种植，栽植 20.玉米，谷物 21.接下来的，接着的22.摆放 23.摆放餐具 24.盘，碟 25.大量，众多 26.丰富的，充足的 17.工具，器械 18.发明，创造 19.那时候 20.有用的，有益的 21.休息，睡眠 22.他自己 23.做成，设法完成 24.继续 25.加拿大
Module 4Module 5Module 6 1.月台，站台1.往楼上，在楼上1.吉他 2.会议，集会2.作业，研究项目2.未能及格 3.关上，合上3.展览。展览会3.考试 4.锁，锁住4.规则，法则4.乐器 5.任何人5.违反法则5.协议 6.叫（某人）起床6.遇上麻烦，处于困境6.习惯
7.钟，时钟7.尾，尾部7.养成…..的习惯 8.发出铃声8.粗绳，绳索8.学生课业
9.乘客，旅客10.地址11.文本，正文12.短信13.一对，两个14.两个少数几个15.关闭16.命令，指示17.工作18.出差19.空的20.胃，腹部21.同班同学22.烧焦，烤糊23.一杯饮料24.简单的，容易的25.任务，工作26.收拾，整理27.青少年28.我们自己9.小孩10.进入权，进入可许11.禁止入内12.难怪13.找不到的，失踪的14.楼下的，在楼下15.惩罚16.物理学17.实验18.沙子19.操作，操纵21.卡车，货车22.轮子，车轮23.速度24.按键25.通讯26.化学27.X射线，X光28.挖掘29.煤30能源，能量31.全部的，整个的9.必要的，必需的10.可惜，遗憾11.代替，而不是12.社区
13.知识，学识14.考虑，斟酌
15.最终决定，最后一句话 16.拜访
17.原因，理由18.试用，试
19.愤怒的，生气的20.不再21.是否22.工程师23.修理
24.事实，真相25.最少的，最小的26.至少，起码
27.诚实的，老实的28.账单
29.终究，毕竟
Module 7Module 8Module 9 1.讨论，谈论1.是….的缩写，代表1.挂，张贴 2.相似的，近似的2.记忆，回忆2.网站 3.思想家3.决定3.邮件 4.有判断力的4.中午，正午4.成百上千 5.评论5.座位，座椅5.一页，页 6.影响，作用于6.踢6.电子的7.道理，意义，合理性7.生气的，恼火的7.满的，充满的 8.合情理，明智，有意义8.跳高8.修补
9.猜想，推测，相信，认为 9.能力10.冒险10.跨栏赛跑11.南方的11.创办，创立12.逃走，逃跑12.比赛，赛跑13.死的，去世的13.记录14.邻居14.方法，办法15.葬礼15.跨栏赛跑16.活着的16.颈，脖子17.邦，州17.运动员18.为….付出代价18.亚洲的，亚洲人19.举止，行为，情节19.患有，经受20.日常的，普通的20.勇气，胆量21.对话21.自豪感，骄傲
Module 101.我们这就试试18.现在，当时2.中心的，在中心的19.阶段，时期
3.相符的20.精灵，神灵，精神 4.根据21.关系 5.高度22.亲戚 6.羊，绵羊23.色拉 7.帽子24.葡萄 8.使保持25.袋鼠
9.避开26.懒散的，懒惰的 10.剪刀 11.羊毛 12.日记 13.写日记 14.讨厌，憎恨 15.蚂蚁 16.刷，刷子
17.把某物从某物上刷掉
9.存储器，存储量 10.说明书 11.借给，借出 12.合适地
13.浏览，快速的阅读 14.由…制成 15.木材，木头 16.一次
17.用手，靠手做 18.发展，进步19.交易，买卖20.扩张，蔓延
21.引进，采用，推行22.仅一个的，单个的23.方向
24.换取，代替
Module 11Module 12 1.打赌，下赌注1.造成 2.整体的，普遍的2.制造厂 3.标准，水准3.工业，行业 4.感觉，直觉看法4.污染 5.困难5.回收利用 6.合适的6.敌人，仇人 7.添加7.庄稼，作物 8.最近8杀死，弄死 9.菜单10.今晚11.获胜者12.冲，跑13.女衬衫14.裙子15.歌手16.祝贺17.男校长18.授予，呈递9.石油 10.较小的 11.土瓷，瓷器 12.分开，分隔 13.塑料
14.政策，方针 15.再次使用
16.用过的，二手的 17.瓶 18.扔掉 19.重说
20.减少，减低，缩小21.午餐盒 22.吨 23.很多 24.橡皮 25.回收利用 26.迅速的 27.步骤 28.孙子 29.孙女
第6篇：外研版九年级上册英语全册教案
西塔庄初级中学英语学科教案
（2014——2015）年度第一学期
年级：九年级 学科：英语 姓名：张雪艳 时间2014年9月
Module 1 Wonders of the world Unit 1
What is a wonder of the world? 教
学
设
计 课
型 Listening and speaking 教材分析 This unit aims to review the learnt tenses so far and help students to be able to present some important and creative ideas about writing a school magazine.教学目标 To learn and understand the topic words through talking and listening.To know something about the pyramids and the Grand Canyon.To understand the conversation about starting a school magazine involving different tenses.知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: ancient, club, composition, pupil, meeting, call, event, listen up.That’s news to me.Anyone else? 2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To learn to give ideas on writing a school magazine.过程与方法 1.Top-down approach, enabling Ss to understand and talk about writing a school magazine.2.To learn by listening, speaking and discuing.情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to know more about writing a school magazine of their own.教学过程
教学步骤 教师活动
学生活动
活动目的Step 1 Lead-in Start the leon by showing groups of pictures about the wonders of the world on the screen including the ancient pyramids.Ask students to talk about the picture on Page 2.T: Where can you see the pictures and the brief introduction probably?(Newspaper / the Internet / Magazine…)
T: Yes, magazines like Crazy English / National Geography…
Who started…? Learn the new vocabulary.(ancient, pyramid, review, wonder…)
Have a talk about the picture using the words in Activity 1.Learn a bit about magazines.Get the Ss to be attentive and focus on the theme of the leon.(Magazine)Step 2 Listening & Vocabulary Play the tape and check the words.Listen to the tape again.Make up poible questions according to the answers.Give examples.Listen and check the words.Make up questions according to the given answers.(Wh-questions)Practise listening and get specific information.Check their understanding by making questions.Step 3.Listen & read Play the tape for the 1st time.Ask Ss questions.T: What are the children doing?
Is there a school magazine in
Da Ming’s school? Listen to the tape and get the answers.Listen to get a general idea for the 1st time.Play the tape again and ask students to decide T OR F.① Crazy feet is a band.② Becky Wang started a school magazine.③ Da Ming watched the interview on TV yesterday ④ Tony is writing a composition.Listen more carefully for the 2nd time.Decide whether they are true or false.Check the answers with the cla.Listen for the specific information and understand the details of the conversation.Step 4.Read Play the tape again and get Ss to practise the conversation.Check the language points.Focus on everyday English and useful expreions.(Listen up, Anyone else? do some review, do an interview, on=about, get better grades)Get Ss to make a list of the articles in magazines.Check the answers in Activity 4.Read the conversation aloud, and read in role.Answer the questions in Activity 4.Practise reading and go over how to give suggestions when in discuion.Learn more about writing a school magazine.Step 5.Pair work Go through the five questions and highlight the key words.Ask for more answers on Question 3.Ss take turns to answer the questions.Consolidate the key words and transit to the next step by Question 3.Step 6.Discuion Tell the Ss: If your school decides to start a magazine, what are you going to write about? And why? They can make up lists and take Activity 3 as an example.Report their discuion.Work out the lists and talk about their plans to write the magazine.Beginning: Our school will start a magazine.What articles are you going to write...Learn to discu in the way as the children do.Check Ss’ creativity.作业布置 Collect information about the seven wonders of the world.(Pictures and brief introductions)板书设计 Unit 1 What is a wonder of the world?
school magazine
That’s news to me!
a wonder
What’s it about?
ancient pyramids
listen up
write a composition
Any more ideas?/ Anyone else?
do some reviews about…
on=about
do an interview with
Unit 2
Ｉwas on the edge of the Grand Canyon.教
学
设
计 课型 教材 分析 Reading and writing By example this unit presents a good way to describe what one sees and feels after a journey.It can help students to know more about the Grand Canyon, and inspire Ss to love and explore the natural wonders.教学目标 To get information from the reading material about the Grand Canyon;To learn the way of writing about what you see and your feelings when traveling;知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: waterfall, stranger, rock, ground, canyon, reply, rise, face, get out of, look over, disappear into, look(acro)to„light-dark, clear, huge, beside, below, at the bottom of, reach the top.„too„to„
2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To love the wonders of the natural world and give facts and opinions.过程方法 1.Interactive approach.2.To improve Ss reading skills and get them to talk and practise writing by imitating.情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to write a description of a wonder that they have seen or visited.教学过程
教学步骤 教师活动
学生活动
活动目的Step 1 Lead-in Ask Ss to show information about the seven natural wonders.(The teacher can get the related pictures ready beforehand)Present words in Activity 1.Talk and give facts about the wonders.Encourage Ss to describe with the words given.Check up Ss’ homework and start the new topic.(Wonders)Step 2.Ask andanswer Ask Ss to make questions about facts of the natural wonders.Demonstrate and get Ss to follow.Ask andanswer.How tall/deep… is it?
It’s…meters tall/deep.Practise asking about detailed information and learn the sentence pattern.Step 3.Read(Skimming)Tell Ss to read the paage in Activity 2.Find out the name of the wonder and its facts.T: Where did the writer visit?
How deep/wide/long is it? Read the paage and
answer thequestions.Find out the facts and write them down in Activity 5.Practise reading skills and get specific information.Step 4 Read and match Play the tape and get Ss to follow silently.Find out the main idea of each paragraph.Present the five topic sentences on the screen(Bb).A.The writer arrived there on the rainy
morning;B.The first impreion/sight of the
Grand Canyon.C.The Grand Canyon is the greatest
wonder in his opinion.D.Details about the Grand Canyon.E.After minutes’ walk, he came to it.Ss follow the lines and match the topic sentences to the paragraphs.(or they can conclude the main idea by themselves if poible)Read for the main idea of each paragraph.Learn to sum up and help to understand the whole paage.Step 5 Read aloud Get Ss to read aloud after the tape and find the details about the trip.① When did he get to the Grand
Canyon? ② Why was there nothing to see? ③ Where was he facing on the edge of
the Grand Canyon? ④ How did he feel about the Canyon? Read aloud and answer questions in Activity 3.Ask for help if they have any problems.Practise reading and learn about the details, check their understanding.Step 6.Focus Now get Ss’ attention to those phrasal verbs and prepositional phrases.Try to check by a gap-filling exercise.(get out of, go through, look over, fall away, on the edge of, look down/acro to, at the bottom of, disappear into, ask oneself)Learn the verbs and phrases.Practising using them with the help of the gap-filling.Focus on the phrasal verbs and prepositions.Step 7.Match Activity 4 Ask Ss to find these words in the paage and gue their meaning within the sentence.Underline the words and match the English meaning.Practise gueing the meaning of words in the context.Step 8.Writing Tell Ss to imagine they have seen(some of them did see)one of the wonders of the world.Write sentences describing how they felt.Remind them of the four keywords: saw, size, happened, felt.First get them to work in pairs and then report the sentences or paage if poible.Write sentences according to the given beginning.Report their answers and tryto make them
into a paage.Practise writing and using the language on the basis of imaging and personal experience.作业布置 Finish writing the description of one of the wonders of the world, trying to collect some details and take the text as a model.板书设计 Unit 2 I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon The seven natural wonders of the world How tall/wide/deep is it? It’s…tall/wide/tall.get out of
on the edge of
ask oneself go through
look down/acro to
huge=very very big look over
at the bottom of
the greatest wonder fall away
disappear into
Unit 3 Language in use
教
学
设
计 课型 Revision and application 教材分析 This unit serves to give a review and summary towards the language points learnt in U1&.2.And it helps to clarify the exact differences among tenses.教学目标 To review and check the words learned in this module;To summarise and consolidate tenses learnt before;知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: height, lift, view, attract, description, location, design 2.To enable the Ss to differ the tenses learned in situations.3.To make a poster of a wonder of the world/ one’s hometown.过程方法 1.Formal and interactive practice, task-based.2.comprehensive ways of practising and consolidating.情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world;To make a poster of a wonder of the world or his hometown and help to love one’s motherland.教学步骤 教师活动 学生活动 活动目的教学过程
Step 1 Revision Ask Ss to watch and listen to the MV Chinese by Andy Lau.Get them to find out the wonder in it.Encourage Ss to describe what they see in it , e.g.The Great Wall is a great wonder.Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.He was singing on it.He has sung many popular songs.… Watch and talk about things appear in the MV.Learn to tell the differences among the tenses.Help to establish the concepts of tenses in situations.Step 2.Grammar focus 1.Read through the sentences in the box with the whole cla.Call back ideas about the structure highlighted from the students.2.Give hand-out to Ss and ask them to match the exact meaning with the corresponding sentence.(Activity 1)Check the answers right after that.1.Read aloud the seven sentences.And tell the making-up of each tense.2.Read through the 5 pairs of sentences in different tenses and match.Practise telling the differences and meanings.Step 3.Writing 1.Go back to the picture of the Great Wall.Give examples by matching the three parts.The Great Wall + is + about 6,700 km long.Give Ss tips on how to decide.2.Encourage Ss to observe and decide the forms of verbs in different tenses.1.Observe the subjects and the adverbial or even the phrasal verbs.Match the three parts to make poible sentences.2.Read through the uncompleted paage and try to give the correct forms of verbs in the situations.Learn to observe and practise language in different tenses.Step 4 Speaking 1.Show up the photo of visiting the Great Wall.Get Ss to ask the teacher questions in Activity 4.(Example)Get Ss to work in pairs, and ask and answer the questions.2.Present wonders in the local area.Get Ss to talk about them.1.Ss follow the teacher and make up their own conversations.Perform in front of the cla.2.Learn the example in Activity 5 and make a similar introduction to the wonders in local area.Practise speaking and enable Ss to use the language and understand its meaning.Step 5 Vocabulary Game Present nine pictures about wonders of the world, each of which links an exercise in Activity 6/8.Get Ss to finish them first and check in forms of game.Elaborate on the Pyramids in Egypt.(More related photos)Finish the multiple-choices exercises and choose the pictures they’re interested in to check the answers.With the help of games, Ss can review the phrasal verbs and concepts of tenses.Step 6.Listening Present the three photos in Activity 7 Ask about facts about any one of them.Play the tape for Ss to learn more.Listen and match the notes with the photos.Check the answers after listening and report about the three wonders with the help of the table.Learn more about the three wonders, practising describing.Step 7.Around the world Get Ss to look at the picture and read silently through the introduction.Give questions to check their understanding.Read and decide, trying to grasp the main information.Learn about another wonder of the world.Step 8.Module task Tell Ss to work in groups of 4.Read through the instructions.Help them to decide what to write about.Hold up a show-and-tell seion where Ss can display and discu.Work in groups of 4 and write about one wonder they like.Collect sufficient information and make the poster.Take part in the show-and-tell seion.Take this task as an extensive learning activity to get Ss to learn more about the wonders.作业布置 Finish off the poster after cla and get ready for the show at the back wall of the claroom.Prepare the show-and-tell seion in groups of four.板书设计 Unit 3 Language in use
Structures of different tenses
ancient
The Great Wall is a wonder…
modern
wonders
Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.natural
He was singing on it
height—What’s the height of…?
We are listening to him now.on the journey of…
He has sung many pop songs.because / because of He will visit it some other day.教学反思：
Module 2 Great books
一、教学内容分析
本模块的话题是谈论书、作家、思想家、戏剧、电影、诗歌等。语法是一般现在时被动语态。
二、学情分析
谈论书、作家、思想家等是学生感兴趣的话题。本模块的学习是通过该话题的讨论，学习并掌握一般现在时被动语态的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句和特殊疑问句。
三、教学目标
1、语言知识目标: ● 功能：谈论书、作家、思想家等。
● 词汇：1）能正确使用下列单词：work,influence,respect,wise,literature, behaviour,cave,freedom,funeral,social,theme,treasure,clever,dead，pleased, alive, southern, state.2)理解下列单词：thinker, monthly, outsider, version, historical，editor, publisher, reviewer.3）能准确理解并使用下列词组；as far as,not„any more,millions of，run away, grow up, talk about, be known as/for ● 语法：一般现在时被动语态。
2、语言技能目标
听：通过听进行单词和图片的配对。
说：谈论最喜欢的书、戏剧、诗歌和作家等。
读：能读懂对书、作家、思想家等作介绍的文章，能掌握从文章到表格 的信息转移。
写：写一本自己最喜欢的书。
3、情感目标：培养学生阅读的习惯，提高个人文化修养。
4、文化意识目标：了解中外著名的作家、思想家、诗人及他们的作品。
四、教学重点、难点
重点：key vocabulary___work, influence,wise,clever,behaviour,dead,alive,treasure
theme, southern,as far as,not…any more,millions of,run away,grow up,talk
about, be known as/for 难点：被动语态的构成和用法，主动语态如何改为被动语态。
五、课时安排 第一课时：Unit 1 第二课时；Unit 2 第三课时：Unit 3 第四、五课时：Review and workbook Unit 1 Confucius’ works are read by many people Teaching aims :Learn the use of present simple paive.Key points: work, influence, thought, wise, copy, as far as, not…any more, millions of, be known as/for Difficult sentences: Shakespeare’s works are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain was an important writer, but he isn’t known as a great thinker like Confucius.Step 1 Warming up& leading in 1.Ask the students some questions.Do you like reading books? What’s your favourite book？Who’s your favourite writer?
2.Show three pictures about Confucius, Shakespeare and Mark Twain.Let them gue who they are.Can you say something about them? Teach the words : work, influence, play, poem, respect, thinker, thought, wise, writer.Confucius: He was a great thinker in China.He is known for his wise thought.We are
still influenced by his thought.He is respected by us.Shakespeare: He was a writer of plays and poems.Some of his most famous plays are Hamlet and Romeo and Juliet.He was born in 1564 in England.His plays are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain: He was a famous American writer.He wrote a lot of stories.His books are still popular.For example ,The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.3.Do Activity 5.complete the sentences with the correct form of the words.Step 2 Listening(Act.1&2)1.First read the words in the box.Then match the words in the box with the people in the pictures.(Act.1)2.Listen and check your answer to Act.1.(Act.2)step 3 Listening and reading(Act.3、4)1.Listen and answer.Where are the speakers? What are they talking about? 2.Read and answer the questions.(Act.4)3.Everyday English and language points.What’s up? Go on!Sounds like a good idea.as far as, not …any more, millions of ,be known as/for 4.Read the conversation in two groups.Step 4 Grammar practice 1.Underline the sentences in the conversation that have the pattern of paive voice.2.Read the sentences aloud.3.Do WB Exercise 1 on p116 Step 5 Speaking and writing 1.Do Act.8 Work in groups of three and look at the opinions in the table.Report ideas of your group to the whole cla.2.Do Act.6 Talk about your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.Homework 1.write your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.2.Listen and read the conversation.3.Search the internet about the book called The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.Unit 2 It’s still read and loved Teaching aims practice reading skills.Try to write a paage about your favourite great book.Key points run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death Difficult sentences 1.The themes of the story are to do with children growing up and becoming more serious 2.It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 1 Warming up & leading in 1.Read the conversation you learned yesterday with your partner.Then answer the questions according to the conversation.What did Betty suggest at the end of the conversation in Unit 1? What’s Mr.Jackson’s favourite book?
2.Ask the students if they have read the book before.What happens in the book? What are the main ideas of the book? Show some pictures of the book and tell the story..Teach the new words: behaviour, cave,freedom,funeral,outsider,pretty,social,theme，treasure, nineteen century Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage quickly and answer the questions.Where can you read the paage? Why does Mr.Jackson like the book? 2.Read the paage again and complete the table with the information about it.(Act.3)3.Read and answer the questions.(Act.4)Step 3 Read aloud and language points
1.Play the tape for the students to listen and read.2.Get the students to read each paragraph and discu the useful words and expreions.run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death
It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 4 Writing
1.Work in pairs.Would you like to read The Adventures of Tom Sawyer ? Why/ Why not? 2.Think of your favourite great book you have read.complete the table in Act.3 3.Write a paage about your favourite great book.My favourite great book is Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone by J.K.Rowling.It’s a story about a young boy… Home work 1.Listen to the tape and practice reading the paage aloud.2.Write a paage about your favourite great book.Unit 3 Language in use Teaching aims Language practice Key points Seeing a play is more interesting than seeing a film.First…then…,next…,after that…,finally… Difficult points The use of paive voice.Step1 Revision 1.Read the paage in Unit 2 2.Show the paage about your favourite great book.Step 2 Vocabulary(Act.5&8)1.Read through the words or phrases in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask the students to complete the paages, then check them.Step 3 Grammar 1.Ask the students to read the sentences in the box.2.Grammar teaching The teacher helps students understand the paive voice 1)被动语态的构成：be +过去分词
时态在be 体现：am /is /are +done, was / were + done, have/has been +done 被动语态的句型：
肯定句：主语+be +过去分词+（by ~）否定句：主语+be not +过去分词+（by ~）一般疑问句：Be+主语+过去分词+（by ~）
特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+ be+主语+过去分词+（by ~）2)被动语态的用法：
I.要表达“被„”、”受„”、“遭„”、“让„”之类的语义。如： 教师很受尊敬—The teachers are well respected.II.强调动作承受者。如：
他远近闻名—He is known far and wide.III.不知道或没有必要指出动作的执行者。如：
房子每天都有人打扫__The room is cleaned every day.3)主动语态如何改为被动语态：
Children
love
these songs
主动语态 These songs
are loved
by children
被动语态 3．Practice Do Act.1,2,3,4 and WB P117 Ex.4&5 Step 4 Listening and speaking(Act.6&7)1.Ask the students to go through the table.2.Listen and check the statements about Betty and Daming agree with.3.Work in pairs.Ask and say which statements you agree with, and why._ __Do you think that modern books are great books? __Yes, I do.I think …/No, I don’t.I think… Step 5 Reading
Read ―Around the world ‖ on P17 and answer the questions.When and where did Plato live? What was he? Where did he travel? What did he do when he returned to Athens? What are his works called? Step 6 Module task Discuion: Are we more influenced by films than by books? 1.Decide on your point of view.2.Think of some examples of films or books you have seen or read.How did they influence you? Homework: 1.Do Ex.2&3 on WB P116 2.Revise Module 2
Review of Module 7 and workbook Step 1 Revision 1.Revise the words and expreions you learned in the module.2.Do self-aement on P119.3.Do Ex 6,7,8 to check their vocabulary.Step 2 Listening and pronunciation.1.Listen and check the true sentences.(Ex 9 on P118)2.Listen and repeat.(Ex 10 on P118)Step 3 Reading 1.Read and answer the questions.(Ex 11 on P118)2.Listen and read it again.Let the students ask more questions about Dickens.Then answer them.Step 4 Grammar 1.Check Ex 2&3 on P116 to revise the paive voice.2.Do some more exercises about it.教学反思：
Module 3 Sporting life
一、教材内容分析：
本模块以体育运动及奥运会为话题，通过谈论BIG与HAS间的前一次和下一次篮球比赛（Unit 1），介绍刘翔的成长历程（Unit 2）及奥运会（Unit 3）展开教学。要求掌握一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态；学习与体育运动相关的词汇及日常用语等。通过学习，放眼时事，体会体育明星光环背后所付出的勤奋与努力。
二、学情分析：
本模块围绕篮球等体育运动及奥运会而展开，又正直北京奥运会倒计时之际。相信学生对此内容会颇感兴趣。同时介绍了刘翔的成长历程，联系现实，阐明体育竞技的伟大及体育训练的艰辛，努力是将来成功的基石。
被动语态共分三个模块讲授，本模块第二次涉及这一内容，可谓承上启下。要求学生在熟练运用各种时态的基础上，将时态与语态相结合，需反复操练。在巩固一般现在时的被动语态的基础上学习一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态，并为学习现在完成时和情态动词的被动语态作好铺垫。
三、教学目标:
语言知识目标:(1)词汇：allow/defeat/stand for/against/tough/encourage/medal/record/set up/ first of all/represent/advertisement/coach/regularly/race(2)日常用语：You’ve got no chance!/What do you reckon?/Don’t let them get to you!/Nice work!(3)语法：一般过去时与一般将来时的被动语态。
(4)话题：讨论有关体育运动与奥运会的话题以及体育明星的成长历程。语言技能目标：
听：通过对话与课文等的听力训练，理解简单的体育运动信息。
说：通过对文本等的学习，辅以问答及讨论等形式反复操练，学会简单讲述某名人的成长历程。
读：提高阅读能力，掌握文本精髓。写：作一份关于班级内同学参加体育运动或观看体育比赛的调查报告。写一篇关于体育明星成长历程的简单报道。情感态度目标：
通过学习，加强团队合作精神的培养，调动学生良性竞争的意识及英语学习的积极性。了解有关体育运动和竞技比赛的要素；了解奥运会特别是即将举行的北京2008年奥运会的相关信息；了解当代体育明星成功的奋斗历程，用理性的思维体会成功背后的艰辛与努力，指导青少年学生的个人成长。
四、教学重点及难点：
(一)掌握与体育运动等相关的词汇、句型及日常用语。
(二)掌握一般过去时与一般将来时被动语态的运用。通过各种题型的反复操练，掌握其与一般现在时的被动语态的不同用法。
(三)简单撰写某体育明星的一段成长经历或成功史。
五、课时安排： Period 1: Unit 1 Period 2: Unit 1-2 Period 3: Unit 2 Period 4: Unit 3 Period 5: Unit 3 Unit 1 When will the match be held? ⅠTeaching model Listening and speaking ⅡTeaching method communicative approach ⅢTeaching aims Key words: allow, defeat, train, tough, chance, reckon, mad Key Phrases: stand for, get to Everyday English: a tough match You’ve got no chance!What do you reckon? Don’t let them get to you!
Nice work!ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, pictures, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step1 Warming-up and listening
1.Look at the pictures and talk something about sports.2.Look at the photos and describe them.You can use some of the words in the box to help you.3.Listen and check the words you hear in Activity 2.Step 2 Listen and read 1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask the students to read through the conversation individually.3.Play the tape and have them read and follow.4.Act it out.5.Learn Everyday English.Step 3 Do Exercises 1.complete the table in Activity 4.2.Listen again and check.3.complete the sentences in Activity 5.Step 4 Work in pairs
Read the sentences from the conversation.Say who the underlined words refer to in Activity 6.Step 5 Explain the important and difficult points
Don’t let them get to you, Tony!不要让他们影响你,托尼!
get to sb.意思是to make someone feel upset or angry,即"让某人感到烦恼,困扰"。如: The heat was beginning to get to me so I went indoors.天气很热,让我开始感到烦躁,所以我回到了屋内。
The smell of her old book really gets to me after a while!过了一会儿,她的旧书散发出的气味实在让我不舒服。
Step 6 Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.Make sure you pause between each sense group in Activity 7.2.Say the sentence in Activity 8.3.Work in pairs.Talk about your favourite sports team or sports star this season.Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.1, 2, 3, 4&5.Unit 2 Liu Xiang was trained for gold.ⅠTeaching model Reading and writing ⅡTeaching method Bottom-up approach ⅢTeaching aims Key vocabulary : encourage , medal , set , set up , yearbook , represent , advertisement , coach , sportsman , overnight , skill , hurdling , sportswoman , race Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids OHP, tape recorder ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Warming-up 1.Gueing game: The Chinese champions in the Olympic Games.2.Talk something about Liu Xiang.3.Show some pictures.Look at the pictures and the title of the paage.Say what you know about Liu Xiang and how he became a sporting hero.4.Introduce the new words.Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage in Activity 2.2.Play the tape and have them read and follow.3.Read the paage again.Step 3 Do exercises 1.Read the paage and choose the sentence which best exprees the main idea.Liu Xiang____.a)was helped by his sports school to become a gold medal winner b)will be encouraged to be a star and not a sporting hero c)has trained for many years , and will continue to win medals 2.complete the time line with the notes in Activity 3.3.Answer the questions in Activity 4.1)As a symbol, what does Liu Xiang represent? 2)Why isn’t Liu Xiang an overnight succe? 3)What was Liu Xiang advised to do in 1998?
4)What was the special programme set up in 2001? 5)What will he be encouraged to do in the future? Step 4 Explain the important and difficult points
1.And now that he's well known all over the world, Liu Xiang will also be asked to appear in advertisements and films, and even to record music.现在由于刘翔已经世界闻名了,他还会被邀请做广告,拍电影,甚至录唱片。
now that 常常用为一种新的情况或状况做出解释,表示"既然；由于"。如: Now that Mr Liu has arrived , we can begin our meeting.既然刘先生已经到了,我们就开会吧。2.Liu was encouraged at first to train as a high jumper.起初,教练支持刘翔练跳高。
encourage sb.to do sth.表示"鼓励某人做某事"。在本句中,encourage一词用于被动语态,表示刘翔是"被鼓励"去某事,而不是他"鼓励"别的人去做某事。如: Ms Wang always encourages us to speak English in cla.王老师总是鼓励我们课
上讲英语。
We were encouraged to learn foreign languages at school.学校鼓励我们学习外语。3.It was set up in 2001 to help young sportsmen and sportswomen.它(特殊项目)建立于2001年,用来帮助年轻运动员。
set up表示"建立,设立;创办(组织,企业);制定(计划等)如:
She plans to set up her own busine.她计划企业办自己的企业。
We need to set a meeting to discu the plan.我们需要开个会来讨论这个计划。4.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态
英语的语态是通过动词形式的变化表现出来的。英语中有两种语态：主动语 态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。例如：
Many people speak Chinese.谓语：speak的动作是由主语many people来执行的。
被动语态表示主语是动作的接受者，即行为动作的对象。例如：
Chinese is spoken by many people.主语Chinese是动词speak的接受者。1)一般过去时的被动语态构成： was/were＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.Liu Xiang’s races were recorded.2)一般将来的被动语态构成： shall/will be＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang will be encouraged to go for more medals for China.Will he be encouraged to spend more time away from sport? 5.Learning to learn Step 5 Writing 1.Rewrite the notes in Activity 3 in full sentences.2.Look at the sentences in Activity 6.A special programme helped Liu Xiang.Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.His skill at hurdling was noticed by his coach Sun Haiping.His coach Sun Haiping noticed his skill at hurdling.3.Write sentences about Zhang Yining's training.4.Join the sentences you wrote in Activity 6 to write a paragraph about Zhang Yining.Use and, although and because.Step6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.6, 7, 8&9.Unit 3 Language in use ⅠTeaching model Revision and application ⅡTeaching method
Formal and interactive practice ⅢTeaching aims 1.Key vocabulary: finishing line, award, marathon, Italian, turn, so far, champion, taekwondo, belt
2.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Revision Review the text of Unit 2 Step 2 Language practice 1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Grammar : 小结一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态
Step 3 Work in pairs.1.Ask and answer the questions in Activity 1.2.complete the paage with the correct form of the words in Activity 2.3.Look at the pictures and put them in the correct order in Activity 3.Step 4 Do exercises 1.complete the conversation with the correct form of the words in the box in Activity 4.2.Choose the best answer in Activity 5.3.Listening:
1)Listen and check the true statements in Activity 6.2)Listen again and choose the correct answer in Activity 7.4.Put the sentences in the correct order to complete the conversation in Activity 8.Step 5 Around the world: The Paralympics Games Step 6 Module task: Module task: Making a cla sports survey
1.Work in groups.Write questions to find out about the sport people like to watch and do.* What sports do you like?
* How often...?
* Do you like to...or...? 2.Carry out your survey.* Ask as many students as you can to answer your questions.3.Write the results of your survey.1)Say how many students you asked the questions were.We asked...student ―What...?‖
2)compare their answers.… students said...and...students said...Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.10, 11, 12&13.教学反思：
Module 4 Great inventions Unit 1 Paper and printing have been used for ages 教 学 目 标
德育目标:To know something about the history of paper inventing 知识目标:To get information about the history of paper inventing from the conversation 能力目标:To talk about the advantages of some inventions To practise the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense and modal verbs.重点
Vocabulary advantage, battery , borrow , camera, charge lend look after, online, photo, promise, same, turn off, turn on 难点
the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense, and modal verbs.课型
Listening and speaking 教法
PWP approach Teaching Procedures: Step one: Revision 1)Talk about some great invention, recall the words of inventions: TV, computer, watch, radios, camera, digital camera, photo, mobile phone, internet.Teach: online magazine 2)Recall what we have learned in the last Module Step two: Listening and vocabulary
1.Talking: What's the advantage of an online magazine 2.Listen and check the words 3.Listen and read ⑴ Play the tape to let the Students get the answer: Can the digital camera be borrowed from Tony's Dad
⑵Do Activity 4.Get the students to show their answers.⑶Listen and repeat.Notes:Everyday English Can I ask a favour 帮忙,赏光 Anyway„谈点别的,另外 Here it is.给你,在这儿 It doesn't matter.没关系
I'll see to that.我会处理的.Is that clear 清楚吗 懂了吗 Promise!我一定!language Points
1)Paper and printing have been used for ages.for ages----for(many)years好多年了.类似短语: for hours/ days/months 等.2)The battery hasn't been charged for a couple of months.a couple of---several 几个
3)I'll see to it.我来处理.see to sb./ sth.= look after, deal with "处理, 照顾, 关照" 4.)You must promise that it won't be….promise to do/ that..= make a promise to do/that 答应, 许诺作某事 Promise!= I promise to do that.我答应!5)turn on----打开 turn off----关闭 turn up-----开大 turn down---关小
eg.Don't forget to ___________the light when you leave the room.Please ___________the TV, the football is beginning.Would you please ________it ______ a little I can't hear it clearly.The baby is sleeping.Please _____________ the radio a little.4.Read the summary of the conversation.Underline the wrong information 5.Answer the questions Ask Ss to say their answers and check them together.6.Find the sentences in the conversation which mean Grammar Points
Will(won't_)+ be +动词的过去分词为一般将来时的被动语态 have/has(not)been + 动词的过去分词为现在完成时的被动语态 情态动词+ be + 动词的过去分词为情态动词的被动语态 Summary: 各种时态的被动语态构成 一般现在时:S+ am/is /are + done 一般过去时:S+ was/were + done 一般将来时:S+ will + be + done
情态动词:S+can/may/must/should+be+done 现在进行时: S+ am/ is/ are + being+ done 过去进行时: S+ was/were + being+ done 现在完成时:S+ have/has + been+ done Pronunciation and Speaking Listen to the sentences and repeat.Homework: Finish work book 1-3 附加练习: 中英互译: I'll see to that._______________ 帮个忙________________ Promise.________________ 照相________________ look after________________ 好几个________________ turn off________________ 几年________________ Here it is.________________ 由„.代替________________ 改为被动语态句子
1.They have published two iues of this magazine.2.Betty has kept my watch for two days.3.I'll charge the battery for your MP3 players.4.I could not find my bag anywhere.课题
Module 4 Great Inventions
Unit 2 Books could be produced more quickly and cheaply.教 学 目 标
德育目标:To research science and love science 知识目标: To understand paages involving present perfect perfect tense 能力目标:To learn a reading skill-----Scanning To know the history about paper inventing 重点
Vocabulary Create, produce, ink, against, knowledge, spread, introduction, receive, 难点
Phrase:made of, at a time, by hand, at the beginning of, in a way, rather than, one day 课型
Reading and writing 教法
PWP approach Teaching Procedures: Step I: Revision Have/has been + done This book/ discu/ on telephone It/ buy/by thousands of people Children/tell to read this book The book/ print/ again and again Other books /write /about this book Must/can/may be done 1.a)All students must read this book.b)This book _____________by all students.2.a)Everyone can understand his ideas.b)His ideas ________________by everyone.3.a)I could not fine her books anywhere.b)Her books ________________anywhere.4.a)For a long time, many people could not use computers.b)computers__________________by many 5.a)We can do the work now if you want.b)The work _____________now if you want.6.a)You must not take these magazines from the library.b)These magazines _________________from the library.Reading and vocabulary 1.Talk in pairs What are the advantages of both book and computers Can books be replaced by computers
2.Read and get the main ideas of the paragraphs P1 c.Life on paper and in print P2 a.The world before books P3.b.The invention of printing P4.d.Technology and books P5.e.Can books be replaced by computers Language Points 1.looks through 浏览,温习
2.with– without 带有„ / 没有„
3.be made of----be made from---be made up of---be made in------be made by—be made into –--4.write words on--make a book--in those days--at a time--by hand---as a result----5.put„ against 将„放进/刻进 hold„ against 将„贴到
6.at the beginning of 在„初/ 开始时 7.after that 然后,之后 in a way 以„方式
8.compare„.with„.与„.相比 , 与„.相媲美
9.rather than 胜过,而不愿 prefer to do„ rather than do„ 情愿„而不..be replaced by 被„.所替代 be read online 在网上阅读
3.Make notes to complete the timeline.4.Answer the questions 1.Why were books expensive and rare before the invention of printing 2.Why did ideas spread more quickly when books became cheaper 3.What can we use instead of books to get information Homework
Finish the workbook exercises 课题
Module 4 Great Inventions Unit 3 Language practice 教学目标
德育目标:To know about some great inventions 知识目标: To practice the use of paive voice 能力目标:To complete a task about "How to improve inventions" 重点
被动语态: 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时——have/has +been+动词的过去分词 难点
情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时——have/has +been+动词的过去分词 课型
Revision and application 教法
Formal and interactive practices Part I: Revision Language practice 现在完成时的被动语态: have/has(not)been +过去分词 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 Conclusion
被动语态的构成:be +动词的过去分词 一般现在时——am/is / are +动词的过去分词 一般过去时——was/were +动词的过去分词
情态动词——aux.v.(must/can/could/may„)+ be +动词的过去分词 现在进行时——be(am,is,are)+being +动词的过去分词 一般将来时——will be/be going to be +动词的过去分词 现在完成时——have/has +been+动词的过去分词 主动语态改成被动语态的步骤及注意事项 1.主动语态的宾语改成被动语态的主语.2.主动语态的谓语动词改成被动语态的谓语动词.do----be done 3.注意保持时态和人称的一致.4.带双宾的谓语动词有两种改法.当把直接宾语改成主语时,谓语动词后必须加适当的介词: to / for.如:give--be given to 此类动词还有:pa show send„
再如:buy---be bought for此类动词还有:make draw cook mend„
5.一些动词不定式在主动语态中省略to作宾语补足语,改成被动语态时,to必须还原.注:1.不及物动词(vi.)不用被动语态.如:happen,take place ,appear disappear„没有被动形式.**几种特殊结构
1.My uncle gave me a gift on my birthday.----I was given a gift on my birthday.A gift was given to me on my birthday.2.We often hear him play the guitar.He is often heard to play the guitar 注意:see, watch, hear, notice, feel, make, listen to, look at等动词/短语后作宾语补语的不定式都不带to;但改成被动语态后必须带to.Part II: Language Practice Read though the sentences with the students and talk about the highlighted structures.Exercises: Activities 1~8 Finish the exx with the students according to the highlighted words of every activity.Check the answers.Homework: Finish off the workbook exercise 教学反思：
Module 5 Museums
The Teaching Plan for Unit1 You mustn't touch it!Topic You mustn't touch it!Type of leon New leon Period(s)Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: To know something about the signs around you and obey the rules.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests and better attitude to learn English.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: To talk about the signs with "mustn't, can't, Don't… No…." And Word Formation--compound words Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the signs Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties &
key points Teaching difficulties & key points: 1.The new words and phrases.2.The listening material of Activity 3.Special Strategies: 1.Give some time to the students to remember the new words.2.Talk something related with listening material before listening.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step1: Greeting and revision have/has been + 过去分词;情态动词+be+过去分词
Step2: Talking: The signs around you(draw some pictures on the blackboard about sighs, ask students to gue)Step3: Listening and vocabulary 1.Match the pictures with the phrases 2.Listen and underline the correct word in each sentence 1)Read the words together and try to understand their meanings.2)Listen and check.3.Listen and read 1)Close the book and listen to the tape, then answer the question: What are they doing 2)Check the answer and listen again then finish part 5.3)Ask some students to check the answers.4)Listen and repeat.Language points: 1)look forward to 与pay attention to 中的to都是介词,后面应跟名词,代词或动名词,如: I'm looking forward to meeting you.You must pay attention to the spelling in your writing.2)Hang on a minute!等一下!3)on one's own 单独的 4)take a photo 拍张照片
5)against 反对 be against doing sth.反对做某事 6)几种表示禁止的表达方式: Don't+动词原形 No+名词/动名词 can't mustn't be not allowed to 7)No, you can't take a photo, either.Either在此用作副词,要与否定词连用,意思是"也不".如, I don't like coffee either.我也不喜欢咖啡.Step 4: Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.2.Pairwork: Talk about the rules you can or can't do in libraries or museums.Homework Copy the new words and recite the useful phrases.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 完成句子.1.禁止喧哗,它违反规定.No shouting!It's against the rules.2.好,让我们下楼吧!Well, let's go downstairs.3.不要碰,禁止你碰它.Don't touch!You mustn't touch it.4.不,你也不能拍照.No, you can't take a photo, either.5.赶快!否则我们将迟到了.Hurry up, or we'll be late for school.Self-reflection The Teaching Plan for Unit2 There's no shouting and no running.Designed by: Yang Lijian Date: Sep.29 Topic Type of leon New leon Period(s)Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.To know something about the Science Museum in London.2.Useful important phrases.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests about the Science Museum.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To get information about the Science Museum in London.2.To understand paages involving compound word.Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties &
key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Phrases and compound word.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the new words.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step1 Revision
Use "mustn't, can't, Don't No." to make more sentences about the rules for museums or libraries.(Tips: game or competition.)Step2 Reading and vocabulary 1.Read the words and talk about the pictures.2.Read the paage and answer the questions.3.Check the answers and listen to the tape.4.complete the table and check 5.Language points: 1)allow doing sth.允许做某事.如, They don't allow smoking in the museum.他们不允许在博物馆吸烟.allow sb.to do sth.允许某人做某事.如, My parents don't allow me to read in the bed.我父母不允许我躺在床上看书.be allowed to do sth.被允许做某事.如, Students are not allowed to smoke.学生们不准吸烟.2)work out 计算出 3)try out 检验,试用
4)fill„with„ 用......填充......She filled the bottle with water.她用水装满了瓶子.区别:be filled with 表示"充满",强调动作;be full of 表示"装满,盛满",表示状态.Hs heart was filled with gratitude.他内心充满了感激之情.The basket was full of flowers.篮子里盛满了花.5)compare„with 与......作比较
6)drop in 顺便走访,也可用于drop in on sb.顺便走访某人.7)Above all "首先,最重要的是" 8)as long as so/as+adj./adv.+as 像......一样
Step 3 Writing complete the paage then check the answers.Homework
Finish the workbook exercises.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 单项选择.1.A: Hellow!Would you like to go to the cinema with me tonight B: I'm sorry, I can't.Father won't B me to go out in the evening.A.let B.allow C.offer D.help 2.We won't allow C n museum.But you are allowed _____ in the rest room.A.smoking;smoking B.smoke;smoking C.smoking;to smoke D.to smoke;to smoke 3.Be careful!The bowl C hot water.A.full of B.fill with C.is filled with D.is fulled of Self-reflection The Teaching Plan for Module5/Unit3 Language in use Topic Type of leon Revision Period(s)Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.Master the key words and structure.2.To practice the use of compound word.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: Talk about you can or can't do something Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To talk about the rules with "mustn't, can't, Don't… No…." Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard.Strategies for teaching difficulties &
key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Use the structure "allow or not allow doing sth." To explain the rules.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the structures.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step 1: Revision 1.Finish part 1 and 2.2.Check the answers and read the sentences in language practice.3.Review:
1)No+v.-ing!如: No smoking!不许吸烟!No joking!不要开玩笑!2)祈使句
否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示"禁止".如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.Don't make any noise.不要吵闹.3)You mustn't…
情态动词mustn't 可以表达"禁止"的概念.如: You mustn't take photographs of the exhibits in museums.博物馆中不得给展品拍照.You mustn't tell it to anyone.你决不可以告诉任何人.4)You can't…
can't 可以表示"能力","可能性",也可以表示"不允许".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.如: In most museums you can't make any noise.在大多数博物馆里不能吵闹.5)You aren't allowed to…
本句型用来制止对方做某事.如: You are not allowed to touch the exhibits.不要触摸展品.Step 2 Finish the all exercises then check it.Step 3 compound words(见书本P179)Exercises: Make new words using the words in Box A and Box B.A
bed cla down home post up wet B card room site stairs work mate load sick Homework Finish off the workbook exercises Review the language points in this module.Blackboard Writing Design 1)No+v.-ing!2)祈使句
否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示"禁止".如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.3)You mustn't… 4)You can't…
can't 可以表示"能力","可能性",也可以表示"不允许".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.5)You aren't allowed to… Self-Reflection 教学反思：
Module 6 Save our world 教案设计
一、教材内容分析
本模块以杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球为话题，让学生在了解地球危机重重的基础上，通过活动，考虑我们学生应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识。讨论话题源于周围环境，贴近生活，便于开展活动。教学中应结合学生实际情况，灵活调整教学内容，合理设置课时。适当进行拓展，以丰富学生知识，拓展学生视野，进行理想、人生责任的教育。
二、学情分析
通过两年的学习，学生已能用英语熟练地表达自己的看法和意见。本模块的话题是环境、资源，这是学生很熟悉也较感兴趣的话题, 但同时对学生的知识储备要求较高。首先要求学生通过多种途径了解地球环境、资源的现状。其次在教师预设的任务中，要使学生有话可说，但是这个话题涉及较多的知识，学生掌握的难度较大, 如果材料处理不当，会导致学生有话想说，却无法用英语表达的尴尬场面。因此在具体安排教学内容时，可由简到难，适当降低难度与要求，让学生更好地运用课本知识，达到提高综合运用语言能力的目的。
三、教学目标
1.语言知识目标 词汇 waste、energy、pollution、recvcle、reusable、reduce、reuse、repair、environmental、hopele、neceary、plastic、sort、harm、material 词组句型 instead of、do harm to、make a difference to、It’s+adj+to、stop from 语法 前缀、后缀构词法 功能 表达如何杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球 话题 以了解地球危机重重为基础，讨论如何拯救地球为话题
2．语言技能目标
听 听懂有关不同保护环境方法的对话，提高学生实际应用能力
说 能用本模块的生词、短语开展对话、讨论，介绍各自生活中保护环境的方法
读 了解地球环境的现状, 通过阅读掌握reduce，reuse，recycle的含义和重要性，进行简单的阅读技能训练
写 1．能用核心词汇写出简短的、表达观点的句子 2．能写出生存现状和保护措施，形成完整的计划性文章
演示与表达 能向全班做有关生存现状和保护措施的发言与展示 3．学习策略目标
通过合作讨论、游戏、竞赛等多种活动形式，实现在用中学，学而能用的原则。
认知策略 联系，归纳，推测等技能。
调控策略 从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。交际策略 学习运用恰当句子表达自己的观点。资源策略 能利用多种途径及学习资源查找信息，用所学内容进行真实交际。自学策略 能借助词汇图掌握单词，形成话题联想的习惯，培养学生的阅读能力技巧。合作学习策略 关心周围的生存现状和保护措施, 交流并分享各自的观点并形成最终观点。
4．文化意识目标
引导学生关注社会，关注身边的事和人，关心周围的生存现状和保护措施，对学生进行环保意识的渗透。同时让他们了解保护环境离我们很近，身边有许多机会，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识和关爱地球之心5．情感态度目标（1）通过开展生动活泼的教学活动，激发学生的兴趣。
（2）培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。同时也积极鼓励学生参与社会实践活动。
（3）引导学生与他人合作，相互帮助，共同完成学习任务，尽情享受学习的乐趣。
四、重点难点
1.教学重点
重点话题：How to be green 2.教学难点
（1）前缀、后缀构词法及其积累
（2）能用恰当地道的英语表达对保护环境的看法。3．突破途径
以话题为核心，通过个人思考、小组及班级活动等不同途径，在听、说、读、写中使单词及句型以不同的形式反复出现，在足够的输入中，达成有效的语言输出。
五、教材处理
1、任务 核心任务：能够运用所学句型结构向不同的朋友交流自己关于保护环境的看法。三个环节如下：
pre-task：学生通过多种途径了解有关环保的知识，激活背景知识。
Task-cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化“地球现状和保护环境的途径”的表达能力，为完成核心任务做好铺垫。
post-task：达成任务，展示成果，自我评价，反馈学习情况。
2、课时安排
Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.Period Two: Unit 2 Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Period Three: Unit 3 Language in use(1)Period Four: Unit 3 Language in use(2)
六、教学设计
Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.Step 1: Warming-up According to the words, let the students say something about our world and describe it.设计意图: 从学生所了解的世界入手，利用学生已有的认知水平进行头脑风暴，主要为下一步世界中最主要的环境问题的引出做准备工作。
Step 2: Lead-in 1.Watch a video about our world.2.Discu: What problems did you see?
3.Work in pairs.Say what you should do about these problems.设计意图:
视频让学生更直观地了解到我们的地球所面临的日趋严重的环境问题。通过观看，思考和讨论，给学生提供一个运用英语的机会，培养了学生注意的能力和主题理解能力，更激发了学生保护环境的意识。
Step 3: Listening
1.Look at the photos.Describe and check them.(Activities 1 and 2)
2.Listen and read.Then do Activties 6 and 7.3.Discu: Look at Activity 5.Choose one of them and answer it.设计意图:
听力是学生的一个难关，因此在设计中应由浅入深，教师加以引导和帮助。活动五在课文中没有直接原文答案，为降低难度，可让学生选择回答，让各层次的学生都有事情可做，都有事情会做，提高参与率和成就感。
Step 4: Speaking
1.Watch a video.2.Disu: Think of some ways of environmental protection.complete the table with the ways.设计意图:
保护环境并不只是政府的事情，其实在我们身边有许多我们能做而常被忽视的。通过观看同龄人的行为，让学生了解我们不该做的很多，我们该做的更多。让学生考虑应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识，培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。
Homework: 1.Review Unit One.2.Workbook: Page 133 Vocabulary and Listening.3.Choose one of the two and finish it.(1)Think of more ways of environmental protection.(2)Find out some problems around you and think how to solve them.Then write it down.Period Two: Unit Two Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Step 1: Warming-up
1.Check the homework.2.Introduce some environmental groups.3.Do a questionnaire.设计意图:
在社会中，包括政府在内，有许多的机构，单位，组织和个人都关心和保护着环境。通过问卷让学生领悟我们虽小，但我们可做的很多，而且这些可做的事就在我们的身边，就在我们的日常生活里，从而为课文的引出做好铺垫。
Step 2: Lead-in
Look at the pictures.Say which things are better for the environment and why.设计意图:
利用学生最熟悉的生活用品比较，在一定的语境中进行讨论和学习词汇。小组讨论可以集思广益，加深对课文的理解。而进行有意义的交流是词汇学习的上上策，培养学生词不离句学语言的好习惯。并且让学生从自身的感受和生活的经验来判断, 激发学生热爱生活、关心生活和保护环境的意识。
Step 3: Reading
1.Read the paage.2.Work in pairs and answer the questions.(Activity 6)
3.Read the paage again and check the things you should do.Then give reasons for what you should or shouldn’t do.(Activities 4 and 5)设计意图:
通过慢速和快速阅读培养正确的阅读方法，让学生了解文章的主旨，同时培养学生的猜词能力，提高阅读能力。通过学生自己的阅读，主动去发现问题，提出问题，并通过不同途径解决问题。通过有意义的回答问题这种说的练习不但加深了对文章的理解，而且突出了语言的交流功能。
Step 4: Writing
1.Work in pairs.Make some lists of things.2.Make suggestions about how to be green.Give reasons，please.设计意图:
本部分为写作活动，与学生们的学习密切相关，同时也巩固先前的阅读所学知识，具有一定的难度，因此有必要提供范文。
1.本活动为写前活动，目的是收集信息，让学生深度理解三个重要词汇。
2.本活动是任务的主要阶段，首先让学生重温根据先前的图表信息，然后制定环保建议和理由。
Homework:
1.Review Unit Two.2.Workbook: Page 134 Reading and writing.3.Choose one of the two and finish it.(1)Make suggestions about how to be green and give reasons.(2)Make a list of things that you have done something to help our environment.Period Three: Unit three Language in use(1)Step 1: Warming-up
1.Check the homework.2.Watch a video.设计意图:
通过观看视频,让学生了解本堂课的主题是利用我们所学到的知识去讨论问题，解决问题。最重要的是如何从身边的小事开始，从我做起去保护环境，爱护环境，以达到学习和生活紧密联系。
Step 2: Practice
1.complete the conversation with the correct form of the phrases in the box.(Activity 9)
2.Read the ideas on protecting the environment.Then practise and answer the questions.(Activities 6 and 7)
3.Work in pairs.Discu the question.(Activity 8)设计意图:
练习经过重组，难度有简到难，逐步深入，让学生自然地接受，消化。练习8又为下一步的讨论打下基础。
Step 3: Discu
Work in pairs and talk about the picture.设计意图:
学生通过任务，分享各自的智慧火花，使口语能力得到提高。通过交流看法，多角度、多元化促进学生对知识的掌握和运用。从听、说逐渐过渡到下一步的写，由口头输出的流畅性过渡到笔头输出的精确性。
Step 4: Module task
1.Discu what you can do about pollution.(1)Decide what type of pollution you want to talk about.It could be water pollutiong, air pollution, waste, cutting down forests, etc.(2)Discu your topic.Say what you think about the problem and what can be done.设计意图:
本部分为写作活动，可以巩固先前的阅读所学知识。本环节分为两个步骤：第一步是挑选内容，第二步是讨论和语篇写作。第一步对于英语基础不好的学生尤为有用。要求学生独立写作，同时又将学生自主学习与小组合作活动相结合，旨在培养学生独立自主的学习能力及分享观点，相互协作的能力。
2.Make a poster to tell others to protect the environment.设计意图:
活动过程可让学生先看一些例子，然后选择一个话题，收集相关资料；为招贴画选择一个标题；对招贴画进行描述介绍；进行评比打分，选择优秀作品在班级报栏展示。该活动有助于培养学生资料收集、筛选的能力，培养学生的主题意识和话题意识，以及小组成员的合作意识。让学生明白不光自己要有环保意识，更要号召、呼吁身边的人一起爱护环境，保护环境。
Homework:
1.Review Language in use(1).2.Finish the module task.Period Four: Unit three Language in use(2)Step 1: Word games
1.Make new words.According as the word, make new words as many as you can.2.Make new words.Join the words in Box A with the parts of words in Box B.Step 2: Practice
1.Do Activities 2, 3 and 4.2.Workbook: Grammar and vocabulary.设计意图:
加前、后缀是英语中最常见的扩充词汇的方式，也是学习英语必须掌握的构词法。但常用的前缀、后缀非常多，因此应指导学生在学习的过程中自己学习，讨论，研究和发现其规律，并注意平时的积累。Homework:
1.Review Language in use(2).2.Finish the module work.教学反思：
Module 7 Australia教学设计
Unit 1 I’m looking for the photos that you took in Australia!
Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: crocodile, shark, hand, have a look at, alongside, detail Key structure: The attributive clause with that
2.Listening skill: To understand conversations involving the Attributive Clause in listening.Improve the students’ listening ability.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Lead in Divide the cla into several groups and each group has two, three or more students.One student acts as a travel agent, the other students want to travel.The agent will recommend some cities or countries to the others.设计意图: 复习七八年级所学过的关于城市和国家的知识，自然的过渡到本单元的关于澳大利亚的重点对话。并且可以培养同学之间的合作与交流，提高会话能力。
Step 2 Presentation Show students a picture of Sydney Opera House and tell them ―Tony’s father has been to Australia.He visited Sydney Opera House.‖ Then get them to listen to the dialogue and answer two questions: 1.Where else did he visit? 2.What animals did he see? 设计意图: 因为是一篇较长的对话，所以让同学们带着问题去听，第一遍不要求逐字逐句听懂，但要能回答出简单的问题。
Step 3 Read and repeat Get the cla to read the dialogue.Then ask them to read in pairs.Step 4 complete the table After the students are familiar to the dialogue, ask them to complete the table in Activity 4.设计意图: 在这一步骤中,让学生从说转移到写上,并且让同学们在完成表格的同时更加熟悉课文。
Step 5 Answer questions Get students to answer questions about the dialogue.Step 6 Grammar Show students several sentences involving The Attributive Clause in this unit.Ask them to think of the use of the word ―that‖.设计意图: 在本单元只是呈现一下定语从句的概念，让同学们对此有一个印象，而不必强调如何去改写定语从句。在以后的两个单元的逐步练习中再让同学们慢慢地对此语法熟悉起来。
Step 7 Homework
1.Read the words and the dialogue frequently.Try to recite part of the dialogue.2.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.Unit 2 The camel that I rode had a bad temper.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: grape, ham, lamb, outback, relative, sheep, spir, surfing, wine, helicopter, purple, similar, ours, cricket, rugby, sunshine, expreion, mate, temper, lifestyle Key structure: 1.The restrictive attributive clause with that 2.Reading skill: The students can read the long paage and can write some notes about it.Improve the students’ reading ability.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Play a game Get the whole cla to play a game called ―I describe, you gue‖.设计意图: 由游戏开始上课,同学们会比较感兴趣，尤其是九年级的同学。通过游戏的形式让同学们能够较轻松地读懂并理解带定语从句的句子。因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。
Step 2 Read and check Get the students to read the paage once or twice quickly, and after that ask them to find the information about some numbers.Then check the true sentences.设计意图: 第二单元编排了一篇长课文，教师可以把它当成阅读课来上。所以先让同学们快速阅读，然后找出一些关键句，并能够判断句子的正误。能够做到以上两点就可以了。Step 3 Read again and write notes.Get the cla to read the paage again, but this time read it more slowly.Then ask them to take some notes for Tony.The students can finish this job individually or they can discu with their partners.设计意图: 通过做笔记，能够使同学们加深对课文的理解，并且加强同学们的归纳理解能力。Step 4 Read and repeat After the students are familiar to the paage, ask them to read the paage after the tape.Then they can read by themselves.Step 5 Explain some useful expreions.The teacher explains some useful expreions and grammar points.Step6 Homework
1.Read the words and the paage frequently.2.Copy the words and expreions.3.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.Unit 3 Language in use Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: water sports, grey, ancestor Speaking skill: To say sentences involving the attributive clause.Writing skill: To write sentences involving the attributive clause.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Play a game Play another ―I describe, you gue.‖ 设计意图: 本单元是一个复习单元,以游戏引出话题，活跃课堂气氛，鼓励学生大胆表达。因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。（让同学们事先准备好图片）。在做这个游戏时，同学们能够很轻松地说出带定语从句的句子，能够在游戏当中掌握好本单元的语法重点。
Step 2 Read a dialogue Read a dialogue completed by the teacher and ask the students to make similar dialogues.Try to use the Attributive Clause.Read the conversation and pay attention to the underlined words.A: Do you want to see my photos? B: what photos? A: The photos that I took in Australia.1.A: What surprised you most in Australia?
B: The thing that surprised me most was the weather!2.A: What do you call that famous Australian animal? The one that can jump very high.B: Oh, you mean a kangaroo.3.A: What’s the name of that dangerous animal?
B: The one that is green? That’s a crocodile.设计意图:本单元是复习单元，尽可能让同学们运用本单元所学过的知识来自己编对话，做到灵活运用，大胆创新，并且还有助于合作与交流。
Step 3 Join the sentences.Ask the students to join the sentences with “that”.(句子见幻灯片)
Step 4 Finish Activity 1 Read the paage and underline all ― that‖ in the Attributive Clause.设计意图:在第三和第四步中，着重点在写上。经过了前面两个单元的学习，本单元的重点是让同学们能够写出带定语从句的句子，这也是本模块的一个任务。
Step 5 Around the world Show students a picture of Australian athlete and hero.Ask students to learn from her.Step 6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook.教学反思：
Module 8 Photos Teaching Plan
一、题材内容
本模块以“摄影”为话题，借此让学生描述自己最理想的摄影作品。通过本模块的学习，学生进一步学习定语从句的用法。为学生提供了充足的语言实际运用的机会。学生可以围绕这一话题进行大量的听、说、读、写方面的语言实践活动,促使学生更有意识地自觉学习英语。语法难点仍是定语从句。教学中教师应随时随地灵活利用各种素材组织教学过程和内容，充分调动学生的积极性。教学目标： 1)语言知识： 语音 能够准确掌握句子中的单词重读。词汇 trouble,shot,kid,expect,historic,size,beauty,category,movement,feature,include,rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, frightened 词组 on the left/right, pick up, even though 语法 能使用who, which 引导的定语从句。功能 Measuring;Describing people and things.话题 以“摄影”为话题。2)语言技能：
听 Identifying photos from descriptions.说 Describing photos.读 Transferring information to a table.写 Writing a description of a photograph.演示与表达 能够向他人介绍自己的摄影作品。3)学习策略
学习一定程度形成自主学习，有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。认知 联系，归纳，推测等技能。学习查词典,阅读报刊,上网等提高自学能力。调控 从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。交际 学习运用恰当词语介绍自己的摄影作品。资源 通过报刊、书籍、网络等其他资源获取更多简单英语的有关摄影的信息。自学策略 能够根据自己的情况预习教材并进行拓展。合作学习策略 能够根据小组内同学的特长分工合作，积极参与讨论，互相学习，取长补短，注意从他人的演示中汲取经验,注意学习策略共享。4)文化意识：乐于了解世界各地人们审美观念。
5)情感态度：培养学生互助合作的情感素质。参加各种英语活动,感受学习的乐趣，克服困难，在新环境中进一步树立准确的语言学习观，通过欣赏他人的摄影作品，提高自己的审美情趣。
6)任务:能够描述自己的摄影作品。教学重点和难点：
重点：1．通过谈论自己的摄影作品，训练学生的听、说、读、写能力； 2.who,which引导的定语从句。
难点： 掌握使用who,which引导的定语从句。教学方法：
基于课程改革的理念及“第二语言习得论”,培养实现人的可持续发展和人的主体精神的自我完善和发展所必需的能力和素质，运用任务型教学途径，围绕核心任务，设定小任务，开展和谐愉悦的课堂活动，强调兴趣第一的原则,初步设计“P—T—P”自主学习立体模式：pre-task„task-cycle„post-task。
二、教材处理
核心任务：能够收集、拍摄自己最喜欢的作品，并能运用所学句型结构谈论他们。三个环节如下：
pre-task：学生联系生活实际，激活背景知识。
task –cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化使用who,which引导的定语从句来谈论摄影作品的表达能力，为完成任务做好铺垫。post-task：达成任务，展示成果，反馈学习情况
三、教材安排
根据学生学习英语的特点和规律，我们把本模块划分为4课时：
Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking Period 2: Reading
Period 3: Writing& Around the world &Module Task Period 4: Language in use 注：教学时应根据学生的学习水平、生活实际水平、接受程度及课堂出现的临时状况进行运用、调整及筛选。『教学设计』
Title:
Module 8 Photos
Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking 1.Teaching Aims and Demands:
1)Key vocabulary: trouble,shot,kid,expect, on the left/right, pick up, 2)Listening skill: To understand conversations involving talking about photos.Improve the students’ listening ability.3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know something about the Blues band, and practise making dialogue about photos.3.Teaching approach: communicative teaching
4.Learning strategies: Bottom –up approach and listening to the tape and do some exercises.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP, Blackboard)6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision
Task 1: Recall what we have learned in Module 7.1.Label the pictures with the words and expreions.(1).Read through the words and expreions in the box and have the Ss.Repeat them after you.(2).Ask them to label them in the pictures on the screen.(3).List some words which are connected with Australia.Ask students to speak out as many as they can.2.Tell something about Australia.Ask students to speak out as much as they can.Step 2 Lead in
Task 2: Show some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, and lead in the topic of photos.Then learn the new words of this unit.1.Get them to enjoy some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, 2.Show them a picture of a concert.Let Ss gue what it is and what’s happing in this photo, then introduce the new words.3.Discu the picture, using the words in the box in Activity 1.Step 3 Listen and read Task 3: Listen to the tape and finish Activity 2.Then check and call back the answers.1.Play the recording while they just listen and focus on the words in Activity 1.2.Have them check their answer with a partner and play the recording again.3.Check and call back the answer from the whole cla.Task 4: Listen to the tape again and do Activity 4,5.Then check and call back the answers.1 Show them the questions in Activity 4.2.Play the recording and have them listen to the recording and focus on the questions in Activity 4.3.Play the recording again and have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.4.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Read the conversations in Activity 3.Make sure that Ss understand the conversation.6.complete the sentences in their own words Activity 5.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 5: Let the Ss finish the Activity 6 by themselves.Then check and call back the answers.1.Show them the questions in Activity 6.2.Have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.3.Then check and call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 6: Read 1.Play the recording again and pause after each phrase, asking the Ss.to repeat chorally and individually.2.Put the Ss.into groups of 5 to practise the dialogue.3.They should repeat it several times, changing the roles each time.Step 4 Pronunciation
Task7: Listen and repeat the sentences in Activity7 on page 65.Make sure that they stre the underlined words.1.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat the sentences.2.Play the recording again.Ask the Ss to pay particular attention to the word stre.3.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat chorally and individually.Step 5 Speaking
Task 8: Work in pairs, choose a photo to talk about and finish Activity 8.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get each of them to choose a photo.2.Ask them to work in pairs to share their descriptions.3.Call back some examples in a whole-cla setting, paying special attention to the use of the attributive clause guided by who which..Step 6 Homework
1.Do Exx7.8&9 in the Wb.2.Oral work: Read the conversation of Activity 3.3.Preview Unit2 in Module 8.Period 2 : Reading 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Language knowledge: historic, size, beauty, category, movement, feature, include, rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, photographer, present, ceremony，even though 2)Reading skills: To detect and foster the students’ reading skills To get information from the reading material.3)Emotion &Attitudes: To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points: To let the students know something about photo competition
and learn something about the differences among entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.3.Learning strategies: communicative approach.4.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(Tape recorder, OHP)5.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1:Help students to revise what was learnt in Period1of this module.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.2.Have the Ss.talk about them.Step 2 Preparation Task2: Let the Ss preview the new words and make them build the conception of entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos, then lead in the Activity 1.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.2.Have the Ss.talk about them.Task 3: Learn the new words, then label the pictures with the words.1.Read through the words on the screen.Have the Ss.Repeat them after you.2.Read the words separately and have them remember them.3.Make some sentences with the words.4.Call back the answers from the whole cla Step 3 Scanning and Skimming Task 4: Scan this paage, according to the content , finish Activity 3.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage as quickly as poible.2.Do Activity 3.complete the table and write notes 3.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Step 4 Reading Task5: Let the Ss read the paage by themselves in details, and do Activity 4.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the sentences in Activity 4.2.Read the paage by themselves.And ask to finish the true or false exercises.3.Check the answers with the whole cla.Task6: Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, and finish Activity 5.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to listen and repeat the paage simultaneously.2.Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, 3.Get the students to correct the sentences..4.Call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Language points in the paage.Task7: Finish Activity 6, Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage together loudly.2.Discu the following questions in groups.1)―…read on to find out who the winners are.‖ where do you find who the winners are?
2)―…the fun which their fans are having.‖ Why are the fans having fun?
3)―It succefully shows the rich culture which makes Beijing so famous..‖ Who or what shows the rich culture? 3.Share the ideas.Step 5 Pairwork Task6:Finish Activity 7.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the table.2.Work in pairs.Ask and answer about the places.3.Get Ss to talk about the claroom.Step 6 Practice 1.Do Exercise 10 on page 142 in the WB.2.Give the students some time to recall what they’ve learned in this cla.Step 7 Homework 1.Read the text.2.Retell the text.Period 3: Writing & Around the world &Module Task 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Writing skill: To write something about a photo.Improve the students’ writing ability.2)Reading skills: To get information from the reading material A famous photo.3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Learning strategies:Top-down and Interactive approach and do some exercises.3.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(Tape recorder, OHP)4.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1: Help students to revise what was learnt in the last cla.1.Revise the words and phrases.2.Let the Ss.retell the text.Step 2 Writing.Task2: Write sentences about their favorite photograph.1.Ask the Ss run through the questions in Activity 8 on Page67 and w rite sentences about their favorite photograph..2.Call back the answers from the whole cla, having individuals read their sentences.Task3: Write a short paage describing their favorite photograph 1.Ask the Ss to do this individually.2.They can exchange it with a partner for peer correction.3.Have some students read their paage out to the whole cla.Step 3 Around the world Task4: Learn something about a famous photo.1.Ask the Ss.to look at the photo about the space.Tell the Ss.some knowledge about it.2.Read the text and answer any questions the Ss have.Step 4 Module Task Task5: Making a photo show.1.Activity 10 on page 71.Ask the Ss.to write about their favorite photo, saying what /who it is and why it is important to them.2.Activity 11 on page 71.Show their photo to their group.And tell others why they like it and why it is important to them..Answer any questions their group may have.Listen to the other members of their group talk about their photos.3.Activity12 on page 71.Put all the photos on the table and talk about them in groups.Step4 Recalling Recall what we have learned today.Step5 Homework 1.Do Ex.11 on page 143.2.Do the Self-aement on page 143.Period 4: Language in use
1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)To detect and foster the students’ understanding of grammar skills(skill)2)To master the useful words and expreions(knowledge)3)To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different
photos(emotion)2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know how to use ―Which and Who ‖ to make attributive clause
3.Teaching approach: communicative teaching
4.Learning strategies: Formal instruction and task-based approach and interactive practice.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(recorder, OHP)6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Help students to revise what is learnt in 3 periods of this module.Step 2 Listen and speak Task1:Look at the photos in Activity 8,then discu them.1.Get Ss.to describe cameras in the photos.2.Say how you think cameras have changed since their earliest beginnings.Task2: Practise listening 1.Ask the Ss.to listen to the conversation and do Activity 9 on page 70 individually.2.Listen again and check with their partners.3.Call the answers back from the cla.Step 2 Write Task 3: complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box.1.Ask the Ss.to complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box in Activity 1 and Activity 7.2.Call the answers back from some students.Step 3 Language practice Task4: To summarize and consolidate the attributive clause guided by who/which.1..Read through the examples with the Ss.and make sure that they are familiar with the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.2.Ask the Ss.to repeat the sentences in the box.3.Ask―Can you make other similar examples?‖
4.Focus the Ss’ attention on the ways in which they are used: who/which.Task5: Do Activity2 and Activity 3 on page 68 individually.1.Ask the Ss.to check with a partner.2..Ask the Ss.to read out the sentences.3.Summarize the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.Task 6: Join the sentences with who or which.1.Ask the Ss.to do Activity 4 on page 69 individually.2.Call the answers back from some students.Task7: Use the knowledge of this module to make an instruction of Activity 5.1.talk about the two pictures.2.Then talk about the people in the two pictures.3.Now ask questions about the picture, and write down their answers.Step 4 Gue Task8: A gueing game
1.Look around the cla and describe something to their partner, using the knowledge of this module.2.Gue who/what I am describing.Step 5 Homework:
1.Finish all the exercises in the WB.2.Preview Module 9.教学反思：
Module 9 Cartoon stories Unit 1 We need someone like superman who can save Tony.Type of leon Listening and speaking Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:
To understand the conversation involving the use of the restrictive attributive clause;Emotional experience: To be able to retell Tony's experience and what his clamates did when Tony was in trouble.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: To ask and give information about one's favourite cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.The new words and phrases.ending, flash, laughing, over there, word, have a word with 2.Master the structure of restrictive attributive clause with that, Which and who.1.Remember the new words of this unit.2.do some exercises by using them,and make more sentences.Teaching procedure Step1 Greeting and revision Say hello to everyone.Revise the grammar by doing some exercises The boys _______are playing football are from Cla One.Football is a game _______is liked by most boys.The school in _______he once studied is very famouse.We bought a book ________had lots of cartoons in it.Step2 Presentation 1).Remember the words in the box of activity 1(with time limit--30s)2).complete the sentences with words what you have remembered A _______________is a person who plays a part in a story, and the _______is the person who plays the main part.A ___________cartoon is one which doesn't make you ________, such as a ____________of a news story.A cartoon in which the hero saves someone is a story with a happy___________.A ________is a story you tell to make people laugh.Step 3 Listen and read.1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask and answer in activity 4 1).What does Betty think the ending will be 2).Why is the situation no laughing matter 3).How do you think Superman can save Tony
4).When will Tony poibly find out that his friends have got the camera 5).Why does Betty says she'll be Superman 3.Explain the language points 1)This is serious.这是很严肃的.2)But it's no laughing matter.但这不是开玩笑的事情.3)to have a word with 和某人说句话 4)That's good news.那是好消息.5)Here you are.给你.6)in deep trouble 处于险境中 7)Oh dear!噢, 天啊!dear adj.①亲爱的, e.g.Dear Sir./ My dear.②昂贵的(expensive)eg.That's a dear shop.③int.(表示伤心,焦急, 惊奇等)呵!哎呀 eg.Oh dear!serious(adj.)严肃的,认真的---seriously(adv.)eg.Are you kidding or are you serious 你是开玩笑还是认真的Grandma is seriously ill.祖母病的很重.4.Translation the whole conversation by students.5.Work in pairs to complete the sentences in activity 5 in your own words.Step4.Pronunciation and speaking Listen and repeat the sentences.Step5.Homework Do the WB activity 1.Learn the conversation by heart.Blackboard Writing Design 1.But it's no laughing matter.但这不是什么可笑的事情.2.Have a word with sb.和某人说句话.比较:Have words with sb.与某人吵架.3.That's a smart idea!等于that's a good idea.4.Be in deep trouble.处于大麻烦/险境中.Self-reflection
Unit 2
There are several fan clubs in China which have held birthday parties for Tintin.Type of leon Reading and writing Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:
1.To get information from the reading material about cartoon stories.2.To learn some new vocabulary.Emotional experience: To learn more expreions of describing cartoon stories.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: 1.To know more about many cartoon of China and abroad;2.To write about a cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.To understand the paage, 2.To learn the restrictive attributive clause with that, who and which 1.To get the main idea of each paragraph.2.Find out the restrictive attributive clause in the paage and explain them.Teaching procedure Step1 Warming-up
1.Review the text of Unit 1
2.Let the students act out the dialogue in pairs.3.Introduce the new words.Step 2: Reading 1.Talk about the following questions by groups.1).Do you like watching cartoons
2).What cartoons have you ever watched 3).Do you know the names of the following cartoon characters 4).Are they in recent cartoons or old cartoons
5).Use the words in the box to describe the cartoon characters.2.Listen to the paage to find out and check your answers.Name of cartoon Recent/Old Description Nemo Shrek the Monkey King Tintin Snoopy 3.Read the paage and find out the sentence which best summarizes the paage in activity 4.4.Listen to the paage again and choose the correct answer.1).The Monkey King is a cartoon character which_______.a)causes problems in heaven b)has travelled to the moon 2).Shrek is a monster who__________.a)falls in love with a prince b)was born from stone 3).Nemo is the name of a _________.a)fish which is caught by a diver b)big, fat cat which is very lazy 4).Snoopy is a lovable dog which was created by____.a)Tintin
b)Charles Brown's 5.Work in pairs and answer the questions in activity5.Step 3.Key words and expreions 1.favourite n.喜欢的东西/人 adj.特别喜欢的 2.series n.系列(单复同形)3.translate v.翻译 translation n.翻译, 转化 translator n.翻译者 4.Belgian n.比利时人 adj.比利时人的 Belgium n.比利时 5.create v.创造 creation n.创造
creative adj.有创造力的6.orange-and-white 橘白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的如果用表同一方面情况(如说明性质,颜色,物质)的两个或两个以上的形容词来作定语需用and连接.7.ever since 从„开始
从他退休以来,已经在这呆五年了.He has been here for 5 years, ever since he retired.8.But it is above all the jokes played by the monkey that people remember.it 引导的强调句用来对句中某一成分加以强调.结构:"It is(或was)+强调部分+ that(或who)„
Step 4.Homework 1.Writing: try to write a cartoon by yourself.2.complete the activities 5~8 on P145(WB)Blackboard Writing Design 1.fan club 影迷俱乐部
2.orange-and-white 橙白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的 合成词作定语 3.win the heart of sb.赢得某人的心 4.in heaven 在天宫里
5.mke a me 搞得乱七八糟 see a me 看到狼籍一片 „„
Self-reflection
Unit 3 Langugage in use Type of leon Revision and application Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals: To summarize and consolidate the language knowledge in this module.Emotional experience: To learn something about cartoons, to complete a task involving making a cartoon story Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Review the paive voices that students' have learned.2.To train students' ability of words and speaking.Realization of culture: Learn how to describe cartoon heroes, how to make a cartoon.Teaching aid Formal and interactive practice, task-based activities Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment To train students' ability of words and speaking.To be able to help each other in communication.Exercise method.Writing and Oral practicing method.Teaching procedure Step 1.Greeting and revision 1.Review the text of Unit 2 2.complete the sentences with which, who or that.1)The man_______we met was a cartoonist.2)He drew a dog___________had six legs.3)The cartoon and the cartoonist _________you're talking about is very famous.4)I know a teacher_______________is also a cartoonist.5)The picture____________I like best is the first one.6)Did the children watch a cartoon____________was drawn by Alice last Friday 3.Join the sentences with who, which or that.There's a Chinese artist.You must meet him.There's a Chinese artist(who)you must meet.Step 2 Language practice 1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask them what language point is demonstrated.Attributive Clauses(引导词的省略)Step4.Vocabulary 1).complete the paage with the correct words in activity 8.2).complete the paage with the correct phrases in the box in activity 9.Step5.Grammar 1.Attributive Clauses The cartoons(which / that)I like have lots of jokes.在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作宾语就可以省略,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作主语就不能省略,否则会造成结构混乱,影响表达.I've got a camera which has got his name on it.Perhaps it'll be a cartoon which has a happy ending.It tells the story of a monkey who leads a group of monkeys.eg.I'd love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make leons that are usually boring more interesting.2.Exercises 1.Do the exercises 1.2.3 in WB.2.多项选择.从下列ABCDE中选出符合题意的任意项.A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom(见附表)
第7篇：外研版英语九年级上册说课稿
Module 1 Wonders of the world
Unit 2I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon.说课稿
各位专家、老师：
下午好！
很荣幸能有这个机会上这堂课，同时，也很忐忑。在座的各位都是资深教师了，都有一双火眼金睛，我的破绽，肯定是一览无余的。
首先，我就本节课的载体（即课文）稍作分析。
本文是谈论作者一次去科罗拉多大峡谷的旅游经历和对大峡谷的介绍。词汇量还是较多的。这篇文章是以游记形式的日记，所以，整篇文章的阅读是以时间轴为主线的。接下来我按照我自己教学的设计稍微作一个解释。
课前播放的图片是2007年新选出来的7大奇迹，学生通过图片可以对世界奇迹有一些了解。Warming up部分是以长城为载体，讨论为什么长城是世界奇迹之一，随之呈现一些新词汇，（wonder, ancient, man-made, disappear）为接下来的阅读减轻了负担。也激起了学生的自豪感。
Pre-reading 部分是直接用大峡谷的图片来导入，让学生就大峡谷有一点了解，也解决了一部分新词汇（edge, ottom, canyon,）。
我为学生每步的阅读预设阅读目的，引导学生使用skimming和scanning等策略来完成阅读任务。本问的阅读设计是总-分-总。首先学生快速阅读后本文呈现的是一则日记的形式，然后根据内容将文章分为三大部分，这样就搭建起了本文的框架，使学生对文本有了明晰的了解，然后再仔细阅读，并引导学生按事情的发展顺序去阅读本文。
第一部分（on the way），主要是信息的提取，其中还有一个猜词 “replay”，这一个题型我在以前不够重视，是上次我们学校校本教研活动时，王老师给我们学校的老师评课时讲到了我们平时阅读课上，可以适当练习一些考试题型，其中猜词就是很好的一个训练，我觉得在课堂上的不知不觉的渗透比讲解考卷时更有效。
第二部分（on the edge），有信息的提取，但是更关注写作中的描写，可以说是细节描写吧。让学生用几个句子自己去体会，并引导学生从事实中去判断作者的观点和情感，也为读后的写作提供一些模仿的依据吧。
第三部分（after the travelling），主要是分析作者对大峡谷的看法，旨在告诉学生在写作过程中也要善于表达情感或观点。
最后环节的任务是让学生对作者的日记进行改写，在改写中，注意写一篇日记的要点。（时间、地点、人物、事情、还有适当的自己的看法）。
最后输出部分，是设想自己曾经去过一个奇迹之地，先合作讨论，最后独立写作。我经验不够，见识浅薄，还望各位多多指教。
第8篇：外研版九年级上册英语全册教案
三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Module 1 Wonders of the world Unit 1
What is a wonder of the world? 上课教师 学生年级
教
材
课
时 教
学
设
计 课
型 Listening and speaking 教材分析 This unit aims to review the learnt tenses so far and help students to be able to present some important and creative ideas about writing a school magazine.教学目标 To learn and understand the topic words through talking and listening.To know something about the pyramids and the Grand Canyon.To understand the conversation about starting a school magazine involving different tenses.知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: ancient, club, composition, pupil, meeting, call, event, listen up.That’s news to me.Anyone else? 2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To learn to give ideas on writing a school magazine.过程与方法 1.Top-down approach, enabling Ss to understand and talk about writing a school magazine.2.To learn by listening, speaking and discuing.情感、态度 与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to know more about writing a school magazine of their own.教学过程
教学步骤 教师活动
学生活动
活动目的Step 1 Lead-in Start the leon by showing groups of pictures about the wonders of the world on the screen including the ancient pyramids.Ask students to talk about the picture on Page 2.T: Where can you see the pictures and the brief introduction probably?(Newspaper / the Internet / Magazine…)
T: Yes, magazines like Crazy English / National Geography…
Who started…? Learn the new vocabulary.(ancient, pyramid, review, wonder…)
Have a talk about the picture using the words in Activity 1.Learn a bit about magazines.Get the Ss to be attentive and focus on the theme of the leon.(Magazine)Step 2 Listening & Vocabulary Play the tape and check the words.Listen to the tape again.Make up poible questions according to the answers.Give examples.Listen and check the words.Make up questions according to the given answers.(Wh-questions)Practise listening and get specific information.Check their understanding by making questions.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Step 3.Listen & read Play the tape for the 1st time.Ask Ss questions.T: What are the children doing?
Is there a school magazine in
Da Ming’s school? the 1st time.Play the tape again and ask students to decide T OR F.① Crazy feet is a band.② Becky Wang started a school magazine.③ Da Ming watched the interview on TV yesterday ④ Tony is writing a composition.Listen more carefully for the 2nd time.Decide whether they are true or false.Check the answers with the cla.Listen for the specific information and understand the details of the conversation.Step 4.Read Play the tape again and get Ss to practise the conversation.Check the language points.Focus on everyday English and useful expreions.(Listen up, Anyone else? do some review, do an interview, on=about, get better grades)Get Ss to make a list of the articles in magazines.Check the answers in Activity 4.Read the conversation aloud, and read in role.Answer the questions in Activity 4.Practise reading and go over how to give suggestions when in discuion.Learn more about writing a school magazine.Step 5.Pair work Go through the five questions and highlight the key words.Ask for more answers on Question 3.Ss take turns to answer the questions.Consolidate the key words and transit to the next step by Question 3.Step 6.Discuion Tell the Ss: If your school decides to start a magazine, what are you going to write about? And why? They can make up lists and take Activity 3 as an example.Report their discuion.Work out the lists and talk about their plans to write the magazine.Beginning: Our school will start a magazine.What articles are you going to write...Learn
to Listen to the tape and get the answers.Listen to get a general idea for discu in the way as the children do.Check Ss’ creativity.作业 布置 Collect information about the seven wonders of the world.(Pictures and brief introductions)板书 设计 Unit 1 What is a wonder of the world?
school magazine
That’s news to me!
a wonder
What’s it about?
ancient pyramids
listen up
write a composition
Any more ideas?/ Anyone else?
do some reviews about…
on=about
do an interview with 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Unit 2
Ｉwas on the edge of the Grand Canyon.上课教师 学生年级
教
材
课
时 教
学
设
计 课型 教材 分析 Reading and writing By example this unit presents a good way to describe what one sees and feels after a journey.It can help students to know more about the Grand Canyon, and inspire Ss to love and explore the natural wonders.教学 目标 To get information from the reading material about the Grand Canyon;To learn the way of writing about what you see and your feelings when traveling;
知识与能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: waterfall, stranger, rock, ground, canyon, reply, rise, face, get out of, look over, disappear into, look(acro)to„light-dark, clear, huge, beside, below, at the bottom of, reach the top.„too„to„
2.To enable the Ss to expre in different tenses according to the set situations.3.To love the wonders of the natural world and give facts and opinions.过程方法 1.Interactive approach.2.To improve Ss reading skills and get them to talk and practise writing by imitating.情感、态度与价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world and help to write a description of a wonder that they have seen or visited.教学过程
教学步骤 教师活动
学生活动
活动目的Step 1 Lead-in Ask Ss to show information about the seven natural wonders.(The teacher can get the related pictures ready beforehand)Present words in Activity 1.Talk and give facts about the wonders.Encourage Ss to describe with the words given.Check up Ss’ homework and start the new topic.(Wonders)Step 2.Ask and answer Ask Ss to make questions about facts of the natural wonders.Demonstrate and get Ss to follow.Ask and answer.How tall/deep… is it? It’s…meters tall/deep.Practise asking about detailed information and learn the sentence pattern.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Step 3.Read(Skimming)
Tell Ss to read the paage in Activity 2.Find out the name of the wonder and its facts.T: Where did the writer visit?
How deep/wide/long is it? Read the paage and answer the questions.Find out the facts and write them down in Activity 5.Practise reading skills and get specific information.Step 4 Read
and match Play the tape and get Ss to follow silently.Find out the main idea of each paragraph.Present the five topic sentences on the screen(Bb).A.The writer arrived there on the rainy
morning;B.The first impreion/sight of the
Grand Canyon.C.The Grand Canyon is the greatest
wonder in his opinion.D.Details about the Grand Canyon.E.After minutes’ walk, he came to it.Ss follow the lines and match the topic sentences to the paragraphs.(or they can conclude the main idea by themselves if poible)Read for the main idea of each paragraph.Learn to sum up and help to understand the whole paage.Step 5 Read aloud Get Ss to read aloud after the tape and find the details about the trip.① When did he get to the Grand
Canyon? ② Why was there nothing to see? ③ Where was he facing on the edge of
the Grand Canyon? ④ How did he feel about the Canyon? Read aloud and answer questions in Activity 3.Ask for help if they have any problems.Practise reading and learn about the details, check their understanding.Step 6.Focus Now get Ss’ attention to those phrasal verbs and prepositional phrases.Try to check by a gap-filling exercise.(get out of, go through, look over, fall away, on the edge of, look down/acro to, at the bottom of, 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
disappear into, ask oneself)Learn the verbs and phrases.Practising using them with the help of the gap-filling.Focus on the phrasal verbs and prepositions.Step 7.Match Activity 4 Ask Ss to find these words in the paage and gue their meaning within the sentence.Underline the words and match the English meaning.Practise gueing the meaning of words in the context.Step 8.Writing Tell Ss to imagine they have seen(some of them did see)one of the wonders of the world.Write sentences describing how they felt.Remind them of the four keywords: saw, size, happened, felt.First get them to work in pairs and then report the sentences or paage if poible.Write sentences according to the given beginning.Report their answers and try to make them
into a paage.Practise writing and using the language on the basis of imaging and personal experience.作业 布置 Finish writing the description of one of the wonders of the world, trying to collect some details and take the text as a model.板书 设计 Unit 2 I was on the edge of the Grand Canyon The seven natural wonders of the world How tall/wide/deep is it? It’s…tall/wide/tall.get out of
on the edge of
ask oneself go through
look down/acro to
huge=very very big look over
at the bottom of
the greatest wonder fall away
disappear into
Unit 3 Language in use
上课教师
学生年级 教
材
课
时
教
学
设
计 课型 Revision and application 教材 分析 This unit serves to give a review and summary towards the language points learnt in U1&.2.And it helps to clarify the exact differences among tenses.教学 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
目标 To review and check the words learned in this module;To summarise and consolidate tenses learnt before;知识 与 能力 1.Vocabulary and expreions: height, lift, view, attract, description, location, design
2.To enable the Ss to differ the tenses learned in situations.3.To make a poster of a wonder of the world/ one’s hometown.过程
方法 1.Formal and interactive practice, task-based.2.comprehensive ways of practising and consolidating.情感、态度与
价值观 To help students enlarge their vision on wonders of the world;To make a poster of a wonder of the world or his hometown and help to love one’s motherland.教学步骤 教师活动 学生活动 活动目的教学过程
Step 1 Revision Ask Ss to watch and listen to the MV Chinese by Andy Lau.Get them to find out the wonder in it.Encourage Ss to describe what they see in it , e.g.The Great Wall is a great wonder.Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.He was singing on it.He has sung many popular songs.… Watch and talk about things appear in the MV.Learn to tell the differences among the tenses.Help to establish the concepts of tenses in situations.Step 2.Grammar focus 1.Read through the sentences in the box with the whole cla.Call back ideas about the structure highlighted from the students.2.Give hand-out to Ss and ask them to match the exact meaning with the corresponding sentence.(Activity 1)Check the answers right after that.1.Read aloud the seven sentences.And tell the making-up of each tense.2.Read through the 5 pairs of sentences in different tenses and match.Practise telling the differences and meanings.Step 3.Writing
1.Go back to the picture of the Great Wall.Give examples by matching the three parts.The Great Wall + is + about 6,700 km long.Give Ss tips on how to decide.2.Encourage Ss to observe and decide the forms of verbs in different tenses.1.Observe the 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
subjects and the adverbial or even the phrasal verbs.Match the three parts to make poible sentences.2.Read through the uncompleted paage and try to give the correct forms of verbs in the situations.Learn to observe and practise language in different tenses.Step 4 Speaking 1.Show up the photo of visiting the Great Wall.Get Ss to ask the teacher questions in Activity 4.(Example)Get Ss to work in pairs, and ask and answer the questions.2.Present wonders in the local area.Get Ss to talk about them.1.Ss follow the teacher and make up their own conversations.Perform in front of the cla.2.Learn the example in Activity 5 and make a similar introduction to the wonders in local area.Practise speaking and enable Ss to use the language and understand its meaning.Step 5 Vocabulary Game Present nine pictures about wonders of the world, each of which links an exercise in Activity 6/8.Get Ss to finish them first and check in forms of game.Elaborate on the Pyramids in Egypt.(More related photos)
Finish the multiple-choices exercises and choose the pictures they’re interested in to check the answers.With the help of games, Ss can review the phrasal verbs and concepts of tenses.Step 6.Listening Present the three photos in Activity 7 Ask about facts about any one of them.Play the tape for Ss to learn more.Listen and match the notes with the photos.Check the answers after listening and report about the three wonders with the help of the table.Learn more about the three wonders, practising describing.Step 7.Around the world Get Ss to look at the picture and read silently through the introduction.Give questions to check their understanding.Read and decide, trying to grasp the main information.Learn about another wonder of the world.Step 8.Module task Tell Ss to work in groups of 4.Read through the instructions.Help them to decide what to write about.Hold up a show-and-tell seion where Ss can display and discu.Work in groups of 4 and write about one wonder they like.Collect sufficient information and make the poster.Take part in the show-and-tell seion.Take this task as an extensive learning activity to get Ss to learn more about the wonders.作业 布置 Finish off the poster after cla and get ready for the show at the back wall of the claroom.Prepare the show-and-tell seion in groups of four.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
板书 设计 Unit 3 Language in use
Structures of different tenses
ancient
The Great Wall is a wonder…
modern
wonders
Andy Lau went to the Great Wall.natural
He was singing on it
height—What’s the height of…?
We are listening to him now.on the journey of…
He has sung many pop songs.because / because of He will visit it some other day.Module 2 Great books
一、教学内容分析
本模块的话题是谈论书、作家、思想家、戏剧、电影、诗歌等。语法是一般现在时被动语态。
二、学情分析 谈论书、作家、思想家等是学生感兴趣的话题。本模块的学习是通过该话题的讨论，学习并掌握一般现在时被动语态的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句和特殊疑问句。
三、教学目标
1、语言知识目标: ● 功能：谈论书、作家、思想家等。
● 词汇：1）能正确使用下列单词：work,influence,respect,wise,literature, behaviour,cave,freedom,funeral,social,theme,treasure,clever,dead，pleased, alive, southern, state.2)理解下列单词：thinker, monthly, outsider, version, historical，editor, publisher, reviewer.3）能准确理解并使用下列词组；as far as,not„any more,millions of，run away, grow up, talk about, be known as/for ● 语法：一般现在时被动语态。
2、语言技能目标
听：通过听进行单词和图片的配对。
说：谈论最喜欢的书、戏剧、诗歌和作家等。
读：能读懂对书、作家、思想家等作介绍的文章，能掌握从文章到表格 的信息转移。
写：写一本自己最喜欢的书。
3、情感目标：培养学生阅读的习惯，提高个人文化修养。
4、文化意识目标：了解中外著名的作家、思想家、诗人及他们的作品。 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
四、教学重点、难点
重点：key vocabulary___work, influence,wise,clever,behaviour,dead,alive,treasure
theme, southern,as far as,not…any more,millions of,run away,grow up,talk
about, be known as/for 难点：被动语态的构成和用法，主动语态如何改为被动语态。
五、课时安排 第一课时：Unit 1 第二课时；Unit 2 第三课时：Unit 3 第四、五课时：Review and workbook
Unit 1 Confucius’ works are read by many people Teaching aims :Learn the use of present simple paive.Key points: work, influence, thought, wise, copy, as far as, not…any more, millions of, be known as/for Difficult sentences: Shakespeare’s works are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain was an important writer, but he isn’t known as a great thinker like Confucius.Step 1 Warming up& leading in 1.Ask the students some questions.Do you like reading books? What’s your favourite book？Who’s your favourite writer?
2.Show three pictures about Confucius, Shakespeare and Mark Twain.Let them gue who they are.Can you say something about them? Teach the words : work, influence, play, poem, respect, thinker, thought, wise, writer.Confucius: He was a great thinker in China.He is known for his wise thought.We are
still influenced by his thought.He is respected by us.Shakespeare: He was a writer of plays and poems.Some of his most famous plays are Hamlet and Romeo and Juliet.He was born in 1564 in England.His plays are seen by millions of people every year.Mark Twain: He was a famous American writer.He wrote a lot of stories.His books are still popular.For example ,The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.3.Do Activity 5.complete the sentences with the correct form of the words.Step 2 Listening(Act.1&2)1.First read the words in the box.Then match the words in the box with the people in the pictures.(Act.1)2.Listen and check your answer to Act.1.(Act.2)step 3 Listening and reading(Act.3、4)1.Listen and answer.Where are the speakers? What are they talking about? 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
2.Read and answer the questions.(Act.4)3.Everyday English and language points.What’s up? Go on!Sounds like a good idea.as far as, not …any more, millions of ,be known as/for 4.Read the conversation in two groups.Step 4 Grammar practice 1.Underline the sentences in the conversation that have the pattern of paive voice.2.Read the sentences aloud.3.Do WB Exercise 1 on p116 Step 5 Speaking and writing 1.Do Act.8 Work in groups of three and look at the opinions in the table.Report ideas of your group to the whole cla.2.Do Act.6 Talk about your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.Homework 1.write your favourite play/poem/thinker/writer/story.2.Listen and read the conversation.3.Search the internet about the book called The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.Unit 2 It’s still read and loved
Teaching aims practice reading skills.Try to write a paage about your favourite great book.Key points run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death Difficult sentences 1.The themes of the story are to do with children growing up and becoming more serious 2.It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 1 Warming up & leading in 1.Read the conversation you learned yesterday with your partner.Then answer the questions according to the conversation.What did Betty suggest at the end of the conversation in Unit 1? What’s Mr.Jackson’s favourite book?
2.Ask the students if they have read the book before.What happens in the book? What are the main ideas of the book? Show some pictures of the book and tell the story..Teach the new words: behaviour, cave,freedom,funeral,outsider,pretty,social,theme，treasure, nineteen century Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage quickly and answer the questions.Where can you read the paage? Why does Mr.Jackson like the book? 2.Read the paage again and complete the table with the information about it.(Act.3)3.Read and answer the questions.(Act.4)Step 3 Read aloud and language points
1.Play the tape for the students to listen and read.2.Get the students to read each paragraph and discu the useful words and expreions.run away, get lost, be surprised/pleased to do ,grow up, do with, die/dead/death
It’s thought to be one of the greatest books.Step 4 Writing 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
1.Work in pairs.Would you like to read The Adventures of Tom Sawyer ? Why/ Why not? 2.Think of your favourite great book you have read.complete the table in Act.3 3.Write a paage about your favourite great book.My favourite great book is Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone by J.K.Rowling.It’s a story about a young boy… Home work 1.Listen to the tape and practice reading the paage aloud.2.Write a paage about your favourite great book.Unit 3 Language in use Teaching aims Language practice Key points Seeing a play is more interesting than seeing a film.First…then…,next…,after that…,finally… Difficult points The use of paive voice.Step1 Revision 1.Read the paage in Unit 2 2.Show the paage about your favourite great book.Step 2 Vocabulary(Act.5&8)1.Read through the words or phrases in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask the students to complete the paages, then check them.Step 3 Grammar 1.Ask the students to read the sentences in the box.2.Grammar teaching The teacher helps students understand the paive voice 1)被动语态的构成：be +过去分词
时态在be 体现：am /is /are +done, was / were + done, have/has been +done 被动语态的句型：
肯定句：主语+be +过去分词+（by ~）
否定句：主语+be not +过去分词+（by ~）一般疑问句：Be+主语+过去分词+（by ~）
特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+ be+主语+过去分词+（by ~）
2)被动语态的用法：
I.要表达“被„”、”受„”、“遭„”、“让„”之类的语义。如： 教师很受尊敬—The teachers are well respected.II.强调动作承受者。如：
他远近闻名—He is known far and wide.III.不知道或没有必要指出动作的执行者。如：
房子每天都有人打扫__The room is cleaned every day.3)主动语态如何改为被动语态：
Children
love
these songs
主动语态 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
These songs
are loved
by children
被动语态 3．Practice Do Act.1,2,3,4 and WB P117 Ex.4&5 Step 4 Listening and speaking(Act.6&7)1.Ask the students to go through the table.2.Listen and check the statements about Betty and Daming agree with.3.Work in pairs.Ask and say which statements you agree with, and why._ __Do you think that modern books are great books? __Yes, I do.I think …/No, I don’t.I think…
Step 5 Reading
Read ―Around the world ‖ on P17 and answer the questions.When and where did Plato live? What was he? Where did he travel? What did he do when he returned to Athens? What are his works called? Step 6 Module task Discuion: Are we more influenced by films than by books? 1.Decide on your point of view.2.Think of some examples of films or books you have seen or read.How did they influence you? Homework: 1.Do Ex.2&3 on WB P116 2.Revise Module 2
Review of Module 7 and workbook Step 1 Revision 1.Revise the words and expreions you learned in the module.2.Do self-aement on P119.3.Do Ex 6,7,8 to check their vocabulary.Step 2 Listening and pronunciation.1.Listen and check the true sentences.(Ex 9 on P118)2.Listen and repeat.(Ex 10 on P118)Step 3 Reading 1.Read and answer the questions.(Ex 11 on P118)2.Listen and read it again.Let the students ask more questions about Dickens.Then answer them.Step 4 Grammar 1.Check Ex 2&3 on P116 to revise the paive voice.2.Do some more exercises about it.Module 3 Sporting life
一、教材内容分析：
本模块以体育运动及奥运会为话题，通过谈论BIG与HAS间的前一次和下一次篮球比三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
赛（Unit 1），介绍刘翔的成长历程（Unit 2）及奥运会（Unit 3）展开教学。要求掌握一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态；学习与体育运动相关的词汇及日常用语等。通过学习，放眼时事，体会体育明星光环背后所付出的勤奋与努力。
二、学情分析：
本模块围绕篮球等体育运动及奥运会而展开，又正直北京奥运会倒计时之际。相信学生对此内容会颇感兴趣。同时介绍了刘翔的成长历程，联系现实，阐明体育竞技的伟大及体育训练的艰辛，努力是将来成功的基石。
被动语态共分三个模块讲授，本模块第二次涉及这一内容，可谓承上启下。要求学生在熟练运用各种时态的基础上，将时态与语态相结合，需反复操练。在巩固一般现在时的被动语态的基础上学习一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态，并为学习现在完成时和情态动词的被动语态作好铺垫。
三、教学目标:
语言知识目标:(1)词汇：allow/defeat/stand for/against/tough/encourage/medal/record/set up/ first of all/represent/advertisement/coach/regularly/race(2)日常用语：You’ve got no chance!/What do you reckon?/Don’t let them get to you!/Nice work!(3)语法：一般过去时与一般将来时的被动语态。
(4)话题：讨论有关体育运动与奥运会的话题以及体育明星的成长历程。
语言技能目标：
听：通过对话与课文等的听力训练，理解简单的体育运动信息。
说：通过对文本等的学习，辅以问答及讨论等形式反复操练，学会简单讲述某名人的成长历程。
读：提高阅读能力，掌握文本精髓。
写：作一份关于班级内同学参加体育运动或观看体育比赛的调查报告。写一篇关于体育明星成长历程的简单报道。情感态度目标：
通过学习，加强团队合作精神的培养，调动学生良性竞争的意识及英语学习的积极性。了解有关体育运动和竞技比赛的要素；了解奥运会特别是即将举行的北京2008年奥运会的相关信息；了解当代体育明星成功的奋斗历程，用理性的思维体会成功背后的艰辛与努力，指导青少年学生的个人成长。
四、教学重点及难点：
(一)掌握与体育运动等相关的词汇、句型及日常用语。
(二)掌握一般过去时与一般将来时被动语态的运用。通过各种题型的反复操练，掌握其与一般现在时的被动语态的不同用法。
(三)简单撰写某体育明星的一段成长经历或成功史。
五、课时安排： Period 1: Unit 1 Period 2: Unit 1-2 Period 3: Unit 2 Period 4: Unit 3 Period 5: Unit 3 Unit 1 When will the match be held? ⅠTeaching model Listening and speaking 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
ⅡTeaching method communicative approach ⅢTeaching aims Key words: allow, defeat, train, tough, chance, reckon, mad Key Phrases: stand for, get to Everyday English: a tough match You’ve got no chance!What do you reckon? Don’t let them get to you!
Nice work!ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, pictures, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step1 Warming-up and listening
1.Look at the pictures and talk something about sports.2.Look at the photos and describe them.You can use some of the words in the box to help you.3.Listen and check the words you hear in Activity 2.Step 2 Listen and read 1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask the students to read through the conversation individually.3.Play the tape and have them read and follow.4.Act it out.5.Learn Everyday English.Step 3 Do Exercises 1.complete the table in Activity 4.2.Listen again and check.3.complete the sentences in Activity 5.Step 4 Work in pairs
Read the sentences from the conversation.Say who the underlined words refer to in Activity 6.Step 5 Explain the important and difficult points
Don’t let them get to you, Tony!不要让他们影响你,托尼!
get to sb.意思是to make someone feel upset or angry,即"让某人感到烦恼,困扰"。如: The heat was beginning to get to me so I went indoors.天气很热,让我开始感到烦躁,所以我回到了屋内。
The smell of her old book really gets to me after a while!过了一会儿,她的旧书散发出的气味实在让我不舒服。
Step 6 Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.Make sure you pause between each sense group in Activity 7.2.Say the sentence in Activity 8.3.Work in pairs.Talk about your favourite sports team or sports star this season.Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.1, 2, 3, 4&5.Unit 2 Liu Xiang was trained for gold.ⅠTeaching model Reading and writing ⅡTeaching method Bottom-up approach ⅢTeaching aims 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Key vocabulary : encourage , medal , set , set up , yearbook , represent , advertisement , coach , sportsman , overnight , skill , hurdling , sportswoman , race Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids OHP, tape recorder ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Warming-up 1.Gueing game: The Chinese champions in the Olympic Games.2.Talk something about Liu Xiang.3.Show some pictures.Look at the pictures and the title of the paage.Say what you know about Liu Xiang and how he became a sporting hero.4.Introduce the new words.Step 2 Reading 1.Read the paage in Activity 2.2.Play the tape and have them read and follow.3.Read the paage again.Step 3 Do exercises 1.Read the paage and choose the sentence which best exprees the main idea.Liu Xiang____.a)was helped by his sports school to become a gold medal winner b)will be encouraged to be a star and not a sporting hero c)has trained for many years , and will continue to win medals 2.complete the time line with the notes in Activity 3.3.Answer the questions in Activity 4.1)As a symbol, what does Liu Xiang represent? 2)Why isn’t Liu Xiang an overnight succe? 3)What was Liu Xiang advised to do in 1998? 4)What was the special programme set up in 2001? 5)What will he be encouraged to do in the future? Step 4 Explain the important and difficult points
1.And now that he's well known all over the world, Liu Xiang will also be asked to appear in advertisements and films, and even to record music.现在由于刘翔已经世界闻名了,他还会被邀请做广告,拍电影,甚至录唱片。
now that 常常用为一种新的情况或状况做出解释,表示"既然；由于"。如: Now that Mr Liu has arrived , we can begin our meeting.既然刘先生已经到了,我们就开会吧。2.Liu was encouraged at first to train as a high jumper.起初,教练支持刘翔练跳高。
encourage sb.to do sth.表示"鼓励某人做某事"。在本句中,encourage一词用于被动语态,表示刘翔是"被鼓励"去某事,而不是他"鼓励"别的人去做某事。如: Ms Wang always encourages us to speak English in cla.王老师总是鼓励我们课
上讲英语。
We were encouraged to learn foreign languages at school.学校鼓励我们学习外语。3.It was set up in 2001 to help young sportsmen and sportswomen.它(特殊项目)建立于2001年,用来帮助年轻运动员。
set up表示"建立,设立;创办(组织,企业);制定(计划等)如:
She plans to set up her own busine.她计划企业办自己的企业。三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
We need to set a meeting to discu the plan.我们需要开个会来讨论这个计划。4.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态
英语的语态是通过动词形式的变化表现出来的。英语中有两种语态：主动语 态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。例如： Many people speak Chinese.谓语：speak的动作是由主语many people来执行的。
被动语态表示主语是动作的接受者，即行为动作的对象。例如： Chinese is spoken by many people.主语Chinese是动词speak的接受者。1)一般过去时的被动语态构成： was/were＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.Liu Xiang’s races were recorded.2)一般将来的被动语态构成： shall/will be＋p.p.（过去分词）eg: Liu Xiang will be encouraged to go for more medals for China.Will he be encouraged to spend more time away from sport? 5.Learning to learn Step 5 Writing 1.Rewrite the notes in Activity 3 in full sentences.2.Look at the sentences in Activity 6.A special programme helped Liu Xiang.Liu Xiang was helped by a special programme.His skill at hurdling was noticed by his coach Sun Haiping.His coach Sun Haiping noticed his skill at hurdling.3.Write sentences about Zhang Yining's training.4.Join the sentences you wrote in Activity 6 to write a paragraph about Zhang Yining.Use and, although and because.Step6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.6, 7, 8&9.Unit 3 Language in use ⅠTeaching model Revision and application ⅡTeaching method
Formal and interactive practice ⅢTeaching aims 1.Key vocabulary: finishing line, award, marathon, Italian, turn, so far, champion, taekwondo, belt
2.Grammar : 一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 ⅣTeaching aids Tape recorder, OHP, handouts ⅤTeaching Steps Step 1 Revision Review the text of Unit 2 Step 2 Language practice 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Grammar : 小结一般过去时和一般将来时的被动语态 Step 3 Work in pairs.1.Ask and answer the questions in Activity 1.2.complete the paage with the correct form of the words in Activity 2.3.Look at the pictures and put them in the correct order in Activity 3.Step 4 Do exercises 1.complete the conversation with the correct form of the words in the box in Activity 4.2.Choose the best answer in Activity 5.3.Listening:
1)Listen and check the true statements in Activity 6.2)Listen again and choose the correct answer in Activity 7.4.Put the sentences in the correct order to complete the conversation in Activity 8.Step 5 Around the world: The Paralympics Games Step 6 Module task: Module task: Making a cla sports survey
1.Work in groups.Write questions to find out about the sport people like to watch and do.* What sports do you like?
* How often...?
* Do you like to...or...? 2.Carry out your survey.* Ask as many students as you can to answer your questions.3.Write the results of your survey.1)Say how many students you asked the questions were.We asked...student ―What...?‖
2)compare their answers.… students said...and...students said...Step 7 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook Ex.10, 11, 12&13.Module 4 Great inventions
Unit 1 Paper and printing have been used for ages 教 学 目 标
德育目标:To know something about the history of paper inventing 知识目标:To get information about the history of paper inventing from the conversation 能力目标:To talk about the advantages of some inventions To practise the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense and modal verbs.重点 Vocabulary advantage, battery , borrow , camera, charge lend look after, online, photo, promise, same, turn off, turn on 难点
the paive voice of the future tense, perfect tense, and modal verbs.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
课型
Listening and speaking 教法
PWP approach Teaching Procedures: Step one: Revision 1)Talk about some great invention, recall the words of inventions: TV, computer, watch, radios, camera, digital camera, photo, mobile phone, internet.Teach: online magazine 2)Recall what we have learned in the last Module Step two: Listening and vocabulary
1.Talking: What's the advantage of an online magazine 2.Listen and check the words
3.Listen and read ⑴ Play the tape to let the Students get the answer: Can the digital camera be borrowed from Tony's Dad
⑵Do Activity 4.Get the students to show their answers.⑶Listen and repeat.Notes:Everyday English Can I ask a favour 帮忙,赏光 Anyway„谈点别的,另外 Here it is.给你,在这儿 It doesn't matter.没关系
I'll see to that.我会处理的.Is that clear 清楚吗 懂了吗 Promise!我一定!language Points
1)Paper and printing have been used for ages.for ages----for(many)years好多年了.类似短语: for hours/ days/months 等.2)The battery hasn't been charged for a couple of months.a couple of---several 几个
3)I'll see to it.我来处理.see to sb./ sth.= look after, deal with "处理, 照顾, 关照" 4.)You must promise that it won't be….promise to do/ that..= make a promise to do/that 答应, 许诺作某事 Promise!= I promise to do that.我答应!5)turn on----打开 turn off----关闭 turn up-----开大 turn down---关小
eg.Don't forget to ___________the light when you leave the room.Please ___________the TV, the football is beginning.Would you please ________it ______ a little I can't hear it clearly.The baby is sleeping.Please _____________ the radio a little.4.Read the summary of the conversation.Underline the wrong information 5.Answer the questions Ask Ss to say their answers and check them together.6.Find the sentences in the conversation which mean Grammar Points
Will(won't_)+ be +动词的过去分词为一般将来时的被动语态 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
have/has(not)been + 动词的过去分词为现在完成时的被动语态 情态动词+ be + 动词的过去分词为情态动词的被动语态 Summary: 各种时态的被动语态构成 一般现在时:S+ am/is /are + done 一般过去时:S+ was/were + done 一般将来时:S+ will + be + done
情态动词:S+can/may/must/should+be+done 现在进行时: S+ am/ is/ are + being+ done 过去进行时: S+ was/were + being+ done 现在完成时:S+ have/has + been+ done Pronunciation and Speaking Listen to the sentences and repeat.Homework: Finish work book 1-3 附加练习: 中英互译: I'll see to that._______________ 帮个忙________________ Promise.________________ 照相________________ look after________________ 好几个________________ turn off________________ 几年________________ Here it is.________________ 由„.代替________________ 改为被动语态句子
1.They have published two iues of this magazine.2.Betty has kept my watch for two days.3.I'll charge the battery for your MP3 players.4.I could not find my bag anywhere.课题
Module 4 Great Inventions
Unit 2 Books could be produced more quickly and cheaply.教 学 目 标
德育目标:To research science and love science 知识目标: To understand paages involving present perfect perfect tense 能力目标:To learn a reading skill-----Scanning To know the history about paper inventing 重点
Vocabulary Create, produce, ink, against, knowledge, spread, introduction, receive, 难点
Phrase:made of, at a time, by hand, at the beginning of, in a way, rather than, one day 课型
Reading and writing 教法
PWP approach Teaching Procedures: 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Step I: Revision Have/has been + done This book/ discu/ on telephone It/ buy/by thousands of people Children/tell to read this book The book/ print/ again and again Other books /write /about this book Must/can/may be done 1.a)All students must read this book.b)This book _____________by all students.2.a)Everyone can understand his ideas.b)His ideas ________________by everyone.3.a)I could not fine her books anywhere.b)Her books ________________anywhere.4.a)For a long time, many people could not use computers.b)computers__________________by many 5.a)We can do the work now if you want.b)The work _____________now if you want.6.a)You must not take these magazines from the library.b)These magazines _________________from the library.Reading and vocabulary 1.Talk in pairs What are the advantages of both book and computers Can books be replaced by computers
2.Read and get the main ideas of the paragraphs P1 c.Life on paper and in print P2 a.The world before books P3.b.The invention of printing P4.d.Technology and books
P5.e.Can books be replaced by computers Language Points
1.looks through 浏览,温习2.with– without 带有„ / 没有„
3.be made of----be made from---be made up of---be made in------be made by—be made into –--4.write words on--make a book--in those days--at a time--by hand---as a result----5.put„ against 将„放进/刻进 hold„ against 将„贴到
6.at the beginning of 在„初/ 开始时 7.after that 然后,之后 in a way 以„方式
8.compare„.with„.与„.相比 , 与„.相媲美
9.rather than 胜过,而不愿 prefer to do„ rather than do„ 情愿„而不..be replaced by 被„.所替代 be read online 在网上阅读
3.Make notes to complete the timeline.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
4.Answer the questions 1.Why were books expensive and rare before the invention of printing 2.Why did ideas spread more quickly when books became cheaper 3.What can we use instead of books to get information Homework
Finish the workbook exercises 课题
Module 4 Great Inventions Unit 3 Language practice 教学目标
德育目标:To know about some great inventions 知识目标: To practice the use of paive voice 能力目标:To complete a task about "How to improve inventions" 重点
被动语态: 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时——have/has +been+动词的过去分词 难点
情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 现在完成时——have/has +been+动词的过去分词 课型
Revision and application 教法
Formal and interactive practices Part I: Revision Language practice 现在完成时的被动语态: have/has(not)been +过去分词 情态动词的被动语态: 情态动词(not)+ be +过去分词 Conclusion
被动语态的构成:be +动词的过去分词
一般现在时——am/is / are +动词的过去分词
一般过去时——was/were +动词的过去分词
情态动词——aux.v.(must/can/could/may„)+ be +动词的过去分词 现在进行时——be(am,is,are)+being +动词的过去分词 一般将来时——will be/be going to be +动词的过去分词 现在完成时——have/has +been+动词的过去分词 主动语态改成被动语态的步骤及注意事项 1.主动语态的宾语改成被动语态的主语.2.主动语态的谓语动词改成被动语态的谓语动词.do----be done 3.注意保持时态和人称的一致.4.带双宾的谓语动词有两种改法.当把直接宾语改成主语时,谓语动词后必须加适当的介词: to / for.如:give--be given to 此类动词还有:pa show send„
再如:buy---be bought for此类动词还有:make draw cook mend„
5.一些动词不定式在主动语态中省略to作宾语补足语,改成被动语态时,to必须还原.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
注:1.不及物动词(vi.)不用被动语态.如:happen,take place ,appear disappear„没有被动形式.**几种特殊结构
1.My uncle gave me a gift on my birthday.----I was given a gift on my birthday.A gift was given to me on my birthday.2.We often hear him play the guitar.He is often heard to play the guitar 注意:see, watch, hear, notice, feel, make, listen to, look at等动词/短语后作宾语补语的不定式都不带to;但改成被动语态后必须带to.Part II: Language Practice Read though the sentences with the students and talk about the highlighted structures.Exercises: Activities 1~8 Finish the exx with the students according to the highlighted words of every activity.Check the answers.Homework: Finish off the workbook exercises
Module 5 Museums
The Teaching Plan for Unit1 You mustn't touch it!Topic You mustn't touch it!Type of leon New leon Period(s)Two
Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: To know something about the signs around you and obey the rules.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests and better attitude to learn English.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: To talk about the signs with "mustn't, can't, Don't… No…." And Word Formation--compound words Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the signs Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
&
key points Teaching difficulties & key points: 1.The new words and phrases.2.The listening material of Activity 3.Special Strategies: 1.Give some time to the students to remember the new words.2.Talk something related with listening material before listening.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching
Procedure Step1: Greeting and revision have/has been + 过去分词;情态动词+be+过去分词 Step2: Talking: The signs around you(draw some pictures on the blackboard about sighs, ask students to gue)Step3: Listening and vocabulary 1.Match the pictures with the phrases 2.Listen and underline the correct word in each sentence 1)Read the words together and try to understand their meanings.2)Listen and check.3.Listen and read 1)Close the book and listen to the tape, then answer the question: What are they doing 2)Check the answer and listen again then finish part 5.3)Ask some students to check the answers.4)Listen and repeat.Language points: 1)look forward to 与pay attention to 中的to都是介词,后面应跟名词,代词或动名词,如: I'm looking forward to meeting you.You must pay attention to the spelling in your writing.2)Hang on a minute!等一下!3)on one's own 单独的 4)take a photo 拍张照片
5)against 反对 be against doing sth.反对做某事
6)几种表示禁止的表达方式: Don't+动词原形 No+名词/动名词 can't mustn't be not allowed to 7)No, you can't take a photo, either.Either在此用作副词,要与否定词连用,意思是"也不".如, I don't like coffee either.我也不喜欢咖啡.Step 4: Pronunciation and speaking 1.Listen and repeat.2.Pairwork: Talk about the rules you can or can't do in libraries or museums.Homework 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Copy the new words and recite the useful phrases.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 完成句子.1.禁止喧哗,它违反规定.No shouting!It's against the rules.2.好,让我们下楼吧!Well, let's go downstairs.3.不要碰,禁止你碰它.Don't touch!You mustn't touch it.4.不,你也不能拍照.No, you can't take a photo, either.5.赶快!否则我们将迟到了.Hurry up, or we'll be late for school.Self-reflection The Teaching Plan for Unit2 There's no shouting and no running.Designed by: Yang Lijian Date: Sep.29 Topic Type of leon New leon Period(s)Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.To know something about the Science Museum in London.2.Useful important phrases.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: More interests about the Science Museum.Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To get information about the Science Museum in London.2.To understand paages involving compound word.Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties &
key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Phrases and compound word.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the new words.Personal adjustment Teaching 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
procedure Teaching Procedure Step1 Revision
Use "mustn't, can't, Don't No." to make more sentences about the rules for museums or libraries.(Tips: game or competition.)Step2 Reading and vocabulary 1.Read the words and talk about the pictures.2.Read the paage and answer the questions.3.Check the answers and listen to the tape.4.complete the table and check 5.Language points: 1)allow doing sth.允许做某事.如, They don't allow smoking in the museum.他们不允许在博物馆吸烟.allow sb.to do sth.允许某人做某事.如, My parents don't allow me to read in the bed.我父母不允许我躺在床上看书.be allowed to do sth.被允许做某事.如, Students are not allowed to smoke.学生们不准吸烟.2)work out 计算出 3)try out 检验,试用
4)fill„with„ 用......填充......She filled the bottle with water.她用水装满了瓶子.区别:be filled with 表示"充满",强调动作;be full of 表示"装满,盛满",表示状态.Hs heart was filled with gratitude.他内心充满了感激之情.The basket was full of flowers.篮子里盛满了花.5)compare„with 与......作比较
6)drop in 顺便走访,也可用于drop in on sb.顺便走访某人.7)Above all "首先,最重要的是" 8)as long as so/as+adj./adv.+as 像......一样
Step 3 Writing complete the paage then check the answers.Homework
Finish the workbook exercises.Blackboard Writing Design Language points and exercises: 单项选择.1.A: Hellow!Would you like to go to the cinema with me tonight B: I'm sorry, I can't.Father won't B me to go out in the evening.A.let B.allow C.offer D.help 2.We won't allow C n museum.But you are allowed _____ in the rest room.A.smoking;smoking B.smoke;smoking C.smoking;to smoke D.to smoke;to smoke 3.Be careful!The bowl C hot water.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
A.full of B.fill with C.is filled with D.is fulled of Self-reflection The Teaching Plan for Module5/Unit3 Language in use Topic Type of leon Revision Period(s)Two Teaching Aims Ⅰ.Aims of basic knowledge: 1.Master the key words and structure.2.To practice the use of compound word.Ⅱ.Aims of emotion: Talk about you can or can't do something Ⅲ.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.To talk about the rules with "mustn't, can't, Don't… No…." Ⅳ.Aims of culture: To get information about the Science Museum in London.Teaching Aids Tape, recorder, pictures, exercise paper, small blackboard.Strategies for teaching difficulties &
key points Teaching difficulties & key points: Use the structure "allow or not allow doing sth." To explain the rules.Special Strategies: Give some time to the students to remember the structures.Personal adjustment Teaching procedure Teaching Procedure Step 1: Revision 1.Finish part 1 and 2.2.Check the answers and read the sentences in language practice.3.Review:
1)No+v.-ing!如: No smoking!不许吸烟!No joking!不要开玩笑!2)祈使句 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示"禁止".如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.Don't make any noise.不要吵闹.3)You mustn't…
情态动词mustn't 可以表达"禁止"的概念.如: You mustn't take photographs of the exhibits in museums.博物馆中不得给展品拍照.You mustn't tell it to anyone.你决不可以告诉任何人.4)You can't…
can't 可以表示"能力","可能性",也可以表示"不允许".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.如: In most museums you can't make any noise.在大多数博物馆里不能吵闹.5)You aren't allowed to…
本句型用来制止对方做某事.如: You are not allowed to touch the exhibits.不要触摸展品.Step 2 Finish the all exercises then check it.Step 3 compound words(见书本P179)Exercises: Make new words using the words in Box A and Box B.A
bed cla down home post up wet B card room site stairs work mate load sick Homework Finish off the workbook exercises Review the language points in this module.Blackboard Writing Design 1)No+v.-ing!2)祈使句
否定的祈使句同样可以用来表示"禁止".如: Don't shout.不要喊叫.3)You mustn't… 4)You can't…
can't 可以表示"能力","可能性",也可以表示"不允许".因此可以用来制止某人做某事.5)You aren't allowed to… Self-reflection
Module 6 Save our world 教案设计 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
一、教材内容分析
本模块以杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球为话题，让学生在了解地球危机重重的基础上，通过活动，考虑我们学生应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识。讨论话题源于周围环境，贴近生活，便于开展活动。教学中应结合学生实际情况，灵活调整教学内容，合理设置课时。适当进行拓展，以丰富学生知识，拓展学生视野，进行理想、人生责任的教育。
二、学情分析
通过两年的学习，学生已能用英语熟练地表达自己的看法和意见。本模块的话题是环境、资源，这是学生很熟悉也较感兴趣的话题, 但同时对学生的知识储备要求较高。首先要求学生通过多种途径了解地球环境、资源的现状。其次在教师预设的任务中，要使学生有话可说，但是这个话题涉及较多的知识，学生掌握的难度较大, 如果材料处理不当，会导致学生有话想说，却无法用英语表达的尴尬场面。因此在具体安排教学内容时，可由简到难，适当降低难度与要求，让学生更好地运用课本知识，达到提高综合运用语言能力的目的。
三、教学目标
1.语言知识目标 词汇 waste、energy、pollution、recvcle、reusable、reduce、reuse、repair、environmental、hopele、neceary、plastic、sort、harm、material 词组句型 instead of、do harm to、make a difference to、It’s+adj+to、stop from 语法 前缀、后缀构词法 功能 话题 表达如何杜绝浪费，保护环境，拯救地球
以了解地球危机重重为基础，讨论如何拯救地球为话题
2．语言技能目标
听 听懂有关不同保护环境方法的对话，提高学生实际应用能力
说 能用本模块的生词、短语开展对话、讨论，介绍各自生活中保护环境的方法
读 了解地球环境的现状, 通过阅读掌握reduce，reuse，recycle的含义和重要性，进行简单的阅读技能训练
写 1．能用核心词汇写出简短的、表达观点的句子
2．能写出生存现状和保护措施，形成完整的计划性文章
演示与表达 能向全班做有关生存现状和保护措施的发言与展示
3．学习策略目标
通过合作讨论、游戏、竞赛等多种活动形式，实现在用中学，学而能用的原则。
认知策略 调控策略 联系，归纳，推测等技能。
从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。
交际策略 学习运用恰当句子表达自己的观点。资源策略 能利用多种途径及学习资源查找信息，用所学内容进行真实交际。自学策略 能借助词汇图掌握单词，形成话题联想的习惯，培养学生的阅读能力技巧。合作学习策略 关心周围的生存现状和保护措施, 交流并分享各自的观点并形成最终观点。
4．文化意识目标 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
引导学生关注社会，关注身边的事和人，关心周围的生存现状和保护措施，对学生进行环保意识的渗透。同时让他们了解保护环境离我们很近，身边有许多机会，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识和关爱地球之心。
5．情感态度目标
（1）通过开展生动活泼的教学活动，激发学生的兴趣。
（2）培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。同时也积极鼓励学生参与社会实践活动。
（3）引导学生与他人合作，相互帮助，共同完成学习任务，尽情享受学习的乐趣。
四、重点难点
1.教学重点
重点话题：How to be green 2.教学难点
（1）前缀、后缀构词法及其积累
（2）能用恰当地道的英语表达对保护环境的看法。3．突破途径
以话题为核心，通过个人思考、小组及班级活动等不同途径，在听、说、读、写中使单词及句型以不同的形式反复出现，在足够的输入中，达成有效的语言输出。
五、教材处理
1、任务
核心任务：能够运用所学句型结构向不同的朋友交流自己关于保护环境的看法。三个环节如下：
pre-task：学生通过多种途径了解有关环保的知识，激活背景知识。
Task-cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化“地球现状和保护环境的途径”的表达能力，为完成核心任务做好铺垫。
post-task：达成任务，展示成果，自我评价，反馈学习情况。
2、课时安排
Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.Period Two: Unit 2 Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Period Three: Unit 3 Language in use(1)Period Four: Unit 3 Language in use(2)
六、教学设计
Period One: Unit 1 It’s wasteful to throw away paper and metal.Step 1: Warming-up According to the words, let the students say something about our world and describe it.设计意图: 从学生所了解的世界入手，利用学生已有的认知水平进行头脑风暴，主要为下一步世界中最主要的环境问题的引出做准备工作。
Step 2: Lead-in 1.Watch a video about our world.2.Discu: What problems did you see?
3.Work in pairs.Say what you should do about these problems.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
设计意图:
视频让学生更直观地了解到我们的地球所面临的日趋严重的环境问题。通过观看，思考和讨论，给学生提供一个运用英语的机会，培养了学生注意的能力和主题理解能力，更激发了学生保护环境的意识。Step 3: Listening
1.Look at the photos.Describe and check them.(Activities 1 and 2)
2.Listen and read.Then do Activties 6 and 7.3.Discu: Look at Activity 5.Choose one of them and answer it.设计意图:
听力是学生的一个难关，因此在设计中应由浅入深，教师加以引导和帮助。活动五在课文中没有直接原文答案，为降低难度，可让学生选择回答，让各层次的学生都有事情可做，都有事情会做，提高参与率和成就感。
Step 4: Speaking
1.Watch a video.2.Disu: Think of some ways of environmental protection.complete the table with the ways.设计意图:
保护环境并不只是政府的事情，其实在我们身边有许多我们能做而常被忽视的。通过观看同龄人的行为，让学生了解我们不该做的很多，我们该做的更多。让学生考虑应怎样从生活细节中采取措施来保护环境，保护地球，进而培养学生的忧患意识和主人翁意识，培养学生热爱生活、热爱自然界，培养保护环境的意识和关爱地球之心。
Homework: 1.Review Unit One.2.Workbook: Page 133 Vocabulary and Listening.3.Choose one of the two and finish it.(1)Think of more ways of environmental protection.(2)Find out some problems around you and think how to solve them.Then write it down.Period Two: Unit Two Remember three words: Reduce, reuse and recycle.Step 1: Warming-up
1.Check the homework.2.Introduce some environmental groups.3.Do a questionnaire.设计意图:
在社会中，包括政府在内，有许多的机构，单位，组织和个人都关心和保护着环境。通过问卷让学生领悟我们虽小，但我们可做的很多，而且这些可做的事就在我们的身边，就在我们的日常生活里，从而为课文的引出做好铺垫。
Step 2: Lead-in
Look at the pictures.Say which things are better for the environment and why.设计意图:
利用学生最熟悉的生活用品比较，在一定的语境中进行讨论和学习词汇。小组讨论可以集思广益，加深对课文的理解。而进行有意义的交流是词汇学习的上上策，培养学生词不离句学语言的好习惯。并且让学生从自身的感受和生活的经验来判断, 激发学生热爱生活、关心生活和保护环境的意识。三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Step 3: Reading
1.Read the paage.2.Work in pairs and answer the questions.(Activity 6)
3.Read the paage again and check the things you should do.Then give reasons for what you should or shouldn’t do.(Activities 4 and 5)设计意图:
通过慢速和快速阅读培养正确的阅读方法，让学生了解文章的主旨，同时培养学生的猜词能力，提高阅读能力。通过学生自己的阅读，主动去发现问题，提出问题，并通过不同途径解决问题。通过有意义的回答问题这种说的练习不但加深了对文章的理解，而且突出了语言的交流功能。
Step 4: Writing
1.Work in pairs.Make some lists of things.2.Make suggestions about how to be green.Give reasons，please.设计意图:
本部分为写作活动，与学生们的学习密切相关，同时也巩固先前的阅读所学知识，具有一定的难度，因此有必要提供范文。
1.本活动为写前活动，目的是收集信息，让学生深度理解三个重要词汇。
2.本活动是任务的主要阶段，首先让学生重温根据先前的图表信息，然后制定环保建议和理由。
Homework:
1.Review Unit Two.2.Workbook: Page 134 Reading and writing.3.Choose one of the two and finish it.(1)Make suggestions about how to be green and give reasons.(2)Make a list of things that you have done something to help our environment.Period Three: Unit three Language in use(1)Step 1: Warming-up
1.Check the homework.2.Watch a video.设计意图:
通过观看视频,让学生了解本堂课的主题是利用我们所学到的知识去讨论问题，解决问题。最重要的是如何从身边的小事开始，从我做起去保护环境，爱护环境，以达到学习和生活紧密联系。Step 2: Practice
1.complete the conversation with the correct form of the phrases in the box.(Activity 9)
2.Read the ideas on protecting the environment.Then practise and answer the questions.(Activities 6 and 7)
3.Work in pairs.Discu the question.(Activity 8)设计意图:
练习经过重组，难度有简到难，逐步深入，让学生自然地接受，消化。练习8又为下一步的讨论打下基础。三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Step 3: Discu
Work in pairs and talk about the picture.设计意图:
学生通过任务，分享各自的智慧火花，使口语能力得到提高。通过交流看法，多角度、多元化促进学生对知识的掌握和运用。从听、说逐渐过渡到下一步的写，由口头输出的流畅性过渡到笔头输出的精确性。
Step 4: Module task
1.Discu what you can do about pollution.(1)Decide what type of pollution you want to talk about.It could be water pollutiong, air pollution, waste, cutting down forests, etc.(2)Discu your topic.Say what you think about the problem and what can be done.设计意图:
本部分为写作活动，可以巩固先前的阅读所学知识。本环节分为两个步骤：第一步是挑选内容，第二步是讨论和语篇写作。第一步对于英语基础不好的学生尤为有用。要求学生独立写作，同时又将学生自主学习与小组合作活动相结合，旨在培养学生独立自主的学习能力及分享观点，相互协作的能力。
2.Make a poster to tell others to protect the environment.设计意图:
活动过程可让学生先看一些例子，然后选择一个话题，收集相关资料；为招贴画选择一个标题；对招贴画进行描述介绍；进行评比打分，选择优秀作品在班级报栏展示。该活动有助于培养学生资料收集、筛选的能力，培养学生的主题意识和话题意识，以及小组成员的合作意识。让学生明白不光自己要有环保意识，更要号召、呼吁身边的人一起爱护环境，保护环境。
Homework:
1.Review Language in use(1).2.Finish the module task.Period Four: Unit three Language in use(2)Step 1: Word games
1.Make new words.According as the word, make new words as many as you can.2.Make new words.Join the words in Box A with the parts of words in Box B.Step 2: Practice
1.Do Activities 2, 3 and 4.2.Workbook: Grammar and vocabulary.设计意图:
加前、后缀是英语中最常见的扩充词汇的方式，也是学习英语必须掌握的构词法。但常用的前缀、后缀非常多，因此应指导学生在学习的过程中自己学习，讨论，研究和发现其规律，并注意平时的积累。
Homework:
1.Review Language in use(2).2.Finish the module work.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Module 7 Australia教学设计
Unit 1 I’m looking for the photos that you took in Australia!
Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: crocodile, shark, hand, have a look at, alongside, detail Key structure: The attributive clause with that
2.Listening skill: To understand conversations involving the Attributive Clause in listening.Improve the students’ listening ability.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Lead in Divide the cla into several groups and each group has two, three or more students.One student acts as a travel agent, the other students want to travel.The agent will recommend some cities or countries to the others.设计意图: 复习七八年级所学过的关于城市和国家的知识，自然的过渡到本单元的关于澳大利亚的重点对话。并且可以培养同学之间的合作与交流，提高会话能力。
Step 2 Presentation Show students a picture of Sydney Opera House and tell them ―Tony’s father has been to Australia.He visited Sydney Opera House.‖ Then get them to listen to the dialogue and answer two questions: 1.Where else did he visit? 2.What animals did he see? 设计意图: 因为是一篇较长的对话，所以让同学们带着问题去听，第一遍不要求逐字逐句听懂，但要能回答出简单的问题。Step 3 Read and repeat Get the cla to read the dialogue.Then ask them to read in pairs.Step 4 complete the table After the students are familiar to the dialogue, ask them to complete the table in Activity 4.设计意图: 在这一步骤中,让学生从说转移到写上,并且让同学们在完成表格的同时更加熟悉课文。
Step 5 Answer questions Get students to answer questions about the dialogue.Step 6 Grammar Show students several sentences involving The Attributive Clause in this unit.Ask them to think of the use of the word ―that‖.设计意图: 在本单元只是呈现一下定语从句的概念，让同学们对此有一个印象，而不必强调如何去改写定语从句。在以后的两个单元的逐步练习中再让同学们慢慢地对此语法熟悉起来。
Step 7 Homework
1.Read the words and the dialogue frequently.Try to recite part of the dialogue.2.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.Unit 2 The camel that I rode had a bad temper.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: grape, ham, lamb, outback, relative, sheep, spir, surfing, wine, helicopter, purple, similar, ours, cricket, rugby, sunshine, expreion, mate, temper, lifestyle Key structure: 1.The restrictive attributive clause with that 2.Reading skill: The students can read the long paage and can write some notes about it.Improve the students’ reading ability.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Play a game Get the whole cla to play a game called ―I describe, you gue‖.设计意图: 由游戏开始上课,同学们会比较感兴趣，尤其是九年级的同学。通过游戏的形式让同学们能够较轻松地读懂并理解带定语从句的句子。因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。
Step 2 Read and check Get the students to read the paage once or twice quickly, and after that ask them to find the information about some numbers.Then check the true sentences.设计意图: 第二单元编排了一篇长课文，教师可以把它当成阅读课来上。所以先让同学们快速阅读，然后找出一些关键句，并能够判断句子的正误。能够做到以上两点就可以了。Step 3 Read again and write notes.Get the cla to read the paage again, but this time read it more slowly.Then ask them to take some notes for Tony.The students can finish this job individually or they can discu with their partners.设计意图: 通过做笔记，能够使同学们加深对课文的理解，并且加强同学们的归纳理解能力。Step 4 Read and repeat After the students are familiar to the paage, ask them to read the paage after the tape.Then they can read by themselves.Step 5 Explain some useful expreions.The teacher explains some useful expreions and grammar points.Step6 Homework
1.Read the words and the paage frequently.2.Copy the words and expreions.3.Finish some exercises in workbook Module 7.Unit 3 Language in use
Teaching Aims and Demands: 1.Language Knowledge Key vocabulary: water sports, grey, ancestor Speaking skill: To say sentences involving the attributive clause.Writing skill: To write sentences involving the attributive clause.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP)Teaching Procedures: 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Step 1 Play a game Play another ―I describe, you gue.‖
设计意图: 本单元是一个复习单元,以游戏引出话题，活跃课堂气氛，鼓励学生大胆表达。因为老师出的题目有限，所以在全班做完之后，若时间允许，还可以分小组做。（让同学们事先准备好图片）。在做这个游戏时，同学们能够很轻松地说出带定语从句的句子，能够在游戏当中掌握好本单元的语法重点。Step 2 Read a dialogue Read a dialogue completed by the teacher and ask the students to make similar dialogues.Try to use the Attributive Clause.Read the conversation and pay attention to the underlined words.A: Do you want to see my photos? B: what photos? A: The photos that I took in Australia.1.A: What surprised you most in Australia?
B: The thing that surprised me most was the weather!2.A: What do you call that famous Australian animal? The one that can jump very high.B: Oh, you mean a kangaroo.3.A: What’s the name of that dangerous animal?
B: The one that is green? That’s a crocodile.设计意图:本单元是复习单元，尽可能让同学们运用本单元所学过的知识来自己编对话，做到灵活运用，大胆创新，并且还有助于合作与交流。
Step 3 Join the sentences.Ask the students to join the sentences with “that”.(句子见幻灯片)
Step 4 Finish Activity 1 Read the paage and underline all ― that‖ in the Attributive Clause.设计意图:在第三和第四步中，着重点在写上。经过了前面两个单元的学习，本单元的重点是让同学们能够写出带定语从句的句子，这也是本模块的一个任务。Step 5 Around the world Show students a picture of Australian athlete and hero.Ask students to learn from her.Step 6 Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook.Module 8 Photos Teaching Plan
一、题材内容
本模块以“摄影”为话题，借此让学生描述自己最理想的摄影作品。通过本模块的学习，学生进一步学习定语从句的用法。为学生提供了充足的语言实际运用的机会。学生可以围绕这一话题进行大量的听、说、读、写方面的语言实践活动,促使学生更有意识地自觉学习英语。语法难点仍是定语从句。教学中教师应随时随地灵活利用各种素材组织教学过程和内容，充分调动学生的积极性。教学目标： 1)语言知识： 语音 能够准确掌握句子中的单词重读。三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
词汇 trouble,shot,kid,expect,historic,size,beauty,category,movement,feature,include,rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, frightened 词组 on the left/right, pick up, even though 语法 功能 能使用who, which 引导的定语从句。Measuring;Describing people and things.话题 以“摄影”为话题。2)语言技能：
听 Identifying photos from descriptions.说 Describing photos.读 Transferring information to a table.写 Writing a description of a photograph.演示与表达 能够向他人介绍自己的摄影作品。
3)学习策略
学习一定程度形成自主学习，有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。认知 联系，归纳，推测等技能。学习查词典,阅读报刊,上网等提高自学能力。调控 从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及作文中的错误进行修改。交际 资源 学习运用恰当词语介绍自己的摄影作品。
通过报刊、书籍、网络等其他资源获取更多简单英语的有关摄影的信息。
自学策略 能够根据自己的情况预习教材并进行拓展。合作学习策略 能够根据小组内同学的特长分工合作，积极参与讨论，互相学习，取长补短，注意从他人的演示中汲取经验,注意学习策略共享。
4)文化意识：乐于了解世界各地人们审美观念。
5)情感态度：培养学生互助合作的情感素质。参加各种英语活动,感受学习的乐趣，克服困难，在新环境中进一步树立准确的语言学习观，通过欣赏他人的摄影作品，提高自己的审美情趣。
6)任务:能够描述自己的摄影作品。
教学重点和难点：
重点：1．通过谈论自己的摄影作品，训练学生的听、说、读、写能力； 2.who,which引导的定语从句。
难点： 掌握使用who,which引导的定语从句。
教学方法：
基于课程改革的理念及“第二语言习得论”,培养实现人的可持续发展和人的主体精神的自我完善和发展所必需的能力和素质，运用任务型教学途径，围绕核心任务，设定小任务，开展和谐愉悦的课堂活动，强调兴趣第一的原则,初步设计“P—T—P”自主学习立体模式：pre-task„task-cycle„post-task。
二、教材处理
核心任务：能够收集、拍摄自己最喜欢的作品，并能运用所学句型结构谈论他们。三个环节如下：
pre-task：学生联系生活实际，激活背景知识。
task –cycle：通过整个模块的听说读写的训练，强化使用who,which引导的定语从句来谈论摄影作品的表达能力，为完成任务做好铺垫。post-task：达成任务，展示成果，反馈学习情况
三、教材安排
根据学生学习英语的特点和规律，我们把本模块划分为4课时： 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking Period 2: Reading
Period 3: Writing& Around the world &Module Task Period 4: Language in use 注：教学时应根据学生的学习水平、生活实际水平、接受程度及课堂出现的临时状况进行运用、调整及筛选。『教学设计』
Title:
Module 8 Photos
Period 1: Vocabulary and Listening &Pronunciation and Speaking 1.Teaching Aims and Demands:
1)Key vocabulary: trouble,shot,kid,expect, on the left/right, pick up, 2)Listening skill: To understand conversations involving talking about photos.Improve the students’ listening ability.3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know something about the Blues band, and practise making dialogue about photos.3.Teaching approach: communicative teaching
4.Learning strategies: Bottom –up approach and listening to the tape and do some exercises.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(or Tape recorder, OHP, Blackboard)6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision
Task 1: Recall what we have learned in Module 7.1.Label the pictures with the words and expreions.(1).Read through the words and expreions in the box and have the Ss.Repeat them after you.(2).Ask them to label them in the pictures on the screen.(3).List some words which are connected with Australia.Ask students to speak out as many as they can.2.Tell something about Australia.Ask students to speak out as much as they can.Step 2 Lead in
Task 2: Show some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, and lead in the topic of photos.Then learn the new words of this unit.1.Get them to enjoy some photos about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty, 2.Show them a picture of a concert.Let Ss gue what it is and what’s happing in this photo, then introduce the new words.3.Discu the picture, using the words in the box in Activity 1.Step 3 Listen and read Task 3: Listen to the tape and finish Activity 2.Then check and call back the answers.1.Play the recording while they just listen and focus on the words in Activity 1.2.Have them check their answer with a partner and play the recording again.3.Check and call back the answer from the whole cla.Task 4: Listen to the tape again and do Activity 4,5.Then check and call back the answers.1 Show them the questions in Activity 4.2.Play the recording and have them listen to the recording and focus on the questions in Activity 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
4.3.Play the recording again and have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.4.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Read the conversations in Activity 3.Make sure that Ss understand the conversation.6.complete the sentences in their own words Activity 5.Then call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 5: Let the Ss finish the Activity 6 by themselves.Then check and call back the answers.1.Show them the questions in Activity 6.2.Have them write down the answers, then check with a partner.3.Then check and call back the answers from the whole cla.Task 6: Read 1.Play the recording again and pause after each phrase, asking the Ss.to repeat chorally and individually.2.Put the Ss.into groups of 5 to practise the dialogue.3.They should repeat it several times, changing the roles each time.Step 4 Pronunciation
Task7: Listen and repeat the sentences in Activity7 on page 65.Make sure that they stre the underlined words.1.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat the sentences.2.Play the recording again.Ask the Ss to pay particular attention to the word stre.3.Ask the Ss to listen and repeat chorally and individually.Step 5 Speaking
Task 8: Work in pairs, choose a photo to talk about and finish Activity 8.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get each of them to choose a photo.2.Ask them to work in pairs to share their descriptions.3.Call back some examples in a whole-cla setting, paying special attention to the use of the attributive clause guided by who which..Step 6 Homework
1.Do Exx7.8&9 in the Wb.2.Oral work: Read the conversation of Activity 3.3.Preview Unit2 in Module 8.Period 2 : Reading 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Language knowledge: historic, size, beauty, category, movement, feature, include, rich, congratulation, photographer, present, ceremony, photographer, present, ceremony，even though 2)Reading skills: To detect and foster the students’ reading skills To get information from the reading material.3)Emotion &Attitudes: To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Teaching difficult and key points: To let the students know something about photo competition
and learn something about the differences among entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
3.Learning strategies: communicative approach.4.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(Tape recorder, OHP)5.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1:Help students to revise what was learnt in Period1of this module.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.2.Have the Ss.talk about them.Step 2 Preparation Task2: Let the Ss preview the new words and make them build the conception of entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos, then lead in the Activity 1.1.Show them some pictures about entertainment, sport, culture, nature beauty photos.2.Have the Ss.talk about them.Task 3: Learn the new words, then label the pictures with the words.1.Read through the words on the screen.Have the Ss.Repeat them after you.2.Read the words separately and have them remember them.3.Make some sentences with the words.4.Call back the answers from the whole cla Step 3 Scanning and Skimming Task 4: Scan this paage, according to the content , finish Activity 3.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage as quickly as poible.2.Do Activity 3.complete the table and write notes 3.Call back the answers from the whole cla.Step 4 Reading Task5: Let the Ss read the paage by themselves in details, and do Activity 4.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the sentences in Activity 4.2.Read the paage by themselves.And ask to finish the true or false exercises.3.Check the answers with the whole cla.Task6: Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, and finish Activity 5.Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to listen and repeat the paage simultaneously.2.Use the given words to find opposite words in each sentences, 3.Get the students to correct the sentences..4.Call back the answers from the whole cla.5.Language points in the paage.Task7: Finish Activity 6, Then check and call back the answers.1.Get the Ss to read the paage together loudly.2.Discu the following questions in groups.1)―…read on to find out who the winners are.‖ where do you find who the winners are?
2)―…the fun which their fans are having.‖ Why are the fans having fun?
3)―It succefully shows the rich culture which makes Beijing so famous..‖ Who or what shows the rich culture? 3.Share the ideas.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Step 5 Pairwork Task6:Finish Activity 7.Then check and call back the answers.1.Read through the table.2.Work in pairs.Ask and answer about the places.3.Get Ss to talk about the claroom.Step 6 Practice 1.Do Exercise 10 on page 142 in the WB.2.Give the students some time to recall what they’ve learned in this cla.Step 7 Homework 1.Read the text.2.Retell the text.Period 3: Writing & Around the world &Module Task 1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)Writing skill: To write something about a photo.Improve the students’ writing ability.2)Reading skills: To get information from the reading material A famous photo.3)Emotion &Attitudes:To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different photos.2.Learning strategies:Top-down and Interactive approach and do some exercises.3.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(Tape recorder, OHP)4.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Task1: Help students to revise what was learnt in the last cla.1.Revise the words and phrases.2.Let the Ss.retell the text.Step 2 Writing.Task2: Write sentences about their favorite photograph.1.Ask the Ss run through the questions in Activity 8 on Page67 and w rite sentences about their favorite photograph..2.Call back the answers from the whole cla, having individuals read their sentences.Task3: Write a short paage describing their favorite photograph 1.Ask the Ss to do this individually.2.They can exchange it with a partner for peer correction.3.Have some students read their paage out to the whole cla.Step 3 Around the world Task4: Learn something about a famous photo.1.Ask the Ss.to look at the photo about the space.Tell the Ss.some knowledge about it.2.Read the text and answer any questions the Ss have.Step 4 Module Task Task5: Making a photo show.1.Activity 10 on page 71.Ask the Ss.to write about their favorite photo, saying what /who it is and why it is important to them.2.Activity 11 on page 71.Show their photo to their group.And tell others why they like it and why it is important to them..Answer any questions their group may have.Listen to the other 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
members of their group talk about their photos.3.Activity12 on page 71.Put all the photos on the table and talk about them in groups.Step4 Recalling Recall what we have learned today.Step5 Homework 1.Do Ex.11 on page 143.2.Do the Self-aement on page 143.Period 4: Language in use
1.Teaching Aims and Demands: 1)To detect and foster the students’ understanding of grammar skills(skill)2)To master the useful words and expreions(knowledge)3)To help the students learn more about different lives in our daily life from different
photos(emotion)2.Teaching difficult and key points:To let the students know how to use ―Which and Who ‖ to make attributive clause
3.Teaching approach: communicative teaching
4.Learning strategies: Formal instruction and task-based approach and interactive practice.5.Teaching Aids: Multi-Media(recorder, OHP)6.Teaching Procedures: Step 1 Revision Help students to revise what is learnt in 3 periods of this module.Step 2 Listen and speak Task1:Look at the photos in Activity 8,then discu them.1.Get Ss.to describe cameras in the photos.2.Say how you think cameras have changed since their earliest beginnings.Task2: Practise listening 1.Ask the Ss.to listen to the conversation and do Activity 9 on page 70 individually.2.Listen again and check with their partners.3.Call the answers back from the cla.Step 2 Write Task 3: complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box.1.Ask the Ss.to complete the paage using the correct form of the words and expreions in the box in Activity 1 and Activity 7.2.Call the answers back from some students.Step 3 Language practice Task4: To summarize and consolidate the attributive clause guided by who/which.1..Read through the examples with the Ss.and make sure that they are familiar with the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.2.Ask the Ss.to repeat the sentences in the box.3.Ask―Can you make other similar examples?‖
4.Focus the Ss’ attention on the ways in which they are used: who/which.Task5: Do Activity2 and Activity 3 on page 68 individually.1.Ask the Ss.to check with a partner.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
2..Ask the Ss.to read out the sentences.3.Summarize the use of the attributive clause guided by who/which.Task 6: Join the sentences with who or which.1.Ask the Ss.to do Activity 4 on page 69 individually.2.Call the answers back from some students.Task7: Use the knowledge of this module to make an instruction of Activity 5.1.talk about the two pictures.2.Then talk about the people in the two pictures.3.Now ask questions about the picture, and write down their answers.Step 4 Gue Task8: A gueing game
1.Look around the cla and describe something to their partner, using the knowledge of this module.2.Gue who/what I am describing.Step 5 Homework:
1.Finish all the exercises in the WB.2.Preview Module 9.The Teaching Plan for Module 9 Cartoon stories Unit 1 We need someone like superman who can save Tony.Type of leon Listening and speaking Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:
To understand the conversation involving the use of the restrictive attributive clause;Emotional experience: To be able to retell Tony's experience and what his clamates did when Tony was in trouble.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: To ask and give information about one's favourite cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for teaching difficulties & 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.The new words and phrases.ending, flash, laughing, over there, word, have a word with 2.Master the structure of restrictive attributive clause with that, Which and who.1.Remember the new words of this unit.2.do some exercises by using them,and make more sentences.Teaching procedure Step1 Greeting and revision Say hello to everyone.Revise the grammar by doing some exercises The boys _______are playing football are from Cla One.Football is a game _______is liked by most boys.The school in _______he once studied is very famouse.We bought a book ________had lots of cartoons in it.Step2 Presentation 1).Remember the words in the box of activity 1(with time limit--30s)2).complete the sentences with words what you have remembered A _______________is a person who plays a part in a story, and the _______is the person who plays the main part.A ___________cartoon is one which doesn't make you ________, such as a ____________of a news story.A cartoon in which the hero saves someone is a story with a happy___________.A ________is a story you tell to make people laugh.Step 3 Listen and read.1.Listen to the tape carefully.2.Ask and answer in activity 4 1).What does Betty think the ending will be 2).Why is the situation no laughing matter 3).How do you think Superman can save Tony
4).When will Tony poibly find out that his friends have got the camera 5).Why does Betty says she'll be Superman 3.Explain the language points 1)This is serious.这是很严肃的.2)But it's no laughing matter.但这不是开玩笑的事情.3)to have a word with 和某人说句话 4)That's good news.那是好消息.5)Here you are.给你.6)in deep trouble 处于险境中
7)Oh dear!噢, 天啊!dear adj.①亲爱的, e.g.Dear Sir./ My dear.②昂贵的(expensive)eg.That's a dear shop.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
③int.(表示伤心,焦急, 惊奇等)呵!哎呀 eg.Oh dear!serious(adj.)严肃的,认真的---seriously(adv.)eg.Are you kidding or are you serious 你是开玩笑还是认真的Grandma is seriously ill.祖母病的很重.4.Translation the whole conversation by students.5.Work in pairs to complete the sentences in activity 5 in your own words.Step4.Pronunciation and speaking Listen and repeat the sentences.Step5.Homework Do the WB activity 1.Learn the conversation by heart.Blackboard Writing Design 1.But it's no laughing matter.但这不是什么可笑的事情.2.Have a word with sb.和某人说句话.比较:Have words with sb.与某人吵架.3.That's a smart idea!等于that's a good idea.4.Be in deep trouble.处于大麻烦/险境中.Self-reflection
Unit 2
There are several fan clubs in China which have held birthday parties for Tintin.Type of leon Reading and writing Period 2 Teaching Aims Language goals:
1.To get information from the reading material about cartoon stories.2.To learn some new vocabulary.Emotional experience: To learn more expreions of describing cartoon stories.Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Improve students' listening and reading skills.2.To train students' ability of listening and speaking.Realization of culture: 1.To know more about many cartoon of China and abroad;2.To write about a cartoon.Teaching aid Recorder, pictures, small blackboard Strategies for 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment 1.To understand the paage, 2.To learn the restrictive attributive clause with that, who and which 1.To get the main idea of each paragraph.2.Find out the restrictive attributive clause in the paage and explain them.Teaching procedure Step1 Warming-up
1.Review the text of Unit 1
2.Let the students act out the dialogue in pairs.3.Introduce the new words.Step 2: Reading 1.Talk about the following questions by groups.1).Do you like watching cartoons
2).What cartoons have you ever watched
3).Do you know the names of the following cartoon characters 4).Are they in recent cartoons or old cartoons
5).Use the words in the box to describe the cartoon characters.2.Listen to the paage to find out and check your answers.Name of cartoon Recent/Old Description Nemo Shrek the Monkey King Tintin Snoopy 3.Read the paage and find out the sentence which best summarizes the paage in activity 4.4.Listen to the paage again and choose the correct answer.1).The Monkey King is a cartoon character which_______.a)causes problems in heaven b)has travelled to the moon 2).Shrek is a monster who__________.a)falls in love with a prince b)was born from stone 3).Nemo is the name of a _________.a)fish which is caught by a diver b)big, fat cat which is very lazy 4).Snoopy is a lovable dog which was created by____.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
a)Tintin
b)Charles Brown's 5.Work in pairs and answer the questions in activity5.Step 3.Key words and expreions 1.favourite n.喜欢的东西/人 adj.特别喜欢的 2.series n.系列(单复同形)3.translate v.翻译 translation n.翻译, 转化 translator n.翻译者 4.Belgian n.比利时人 adj.比利时人的 Belgium n.比利时 5.create v.创造
creation n.创造
creative adj.有创造力的6.orange-and-white 橘白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的如果用表同一方面情况(如说明性质,颜色,物质)的两个或两个以上的形容词来作定语需用and连接.7.ever since 从„开始
从他退休以来,已经在这呆五年了.He has been here for 5 years, ever since he retired.8.But it is above all the jokes played by the monkey that people remember.it 引导的强调句用来对句中某一成分加以强调.结构:"It is(或was)+强调部分+ that(或who)„ Step 4.Homework 1.Writing: try to write a cartoon by yourself.2.complete the activities 5~8 on P145(WB)Blackboard Writing Design 1.fan club 影迷俱乐部
2.orange-and-white 橙白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的 合成词作定语 3.win the heart of sb.赢得某人的心
4.in heaven 在天宫里
5.mke a me 搞得乱七八糟 see a me 看到狼籍一片 „„ Self-reflection
Unit 3 Langugage in use Type of leon Revision and application Period 2 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Teaching Aims Language goals: To summarize and consolidate the language knowledge in this module.Emotional experience: To learn something about cartoons, to complete a task involving making a cartoon story Learning abilities & strategies: 1.Review the paive voices that students' have learned.2.To train students' ability of words and speaking.Realization of culture: Learn how to describe cartoon heroes, how to make a cartoon.Teaching aid Formal and interactive practice, task-based activities Strategies for teaching difficulties & key points Teaching difficulties & key points Special Strategies Personal adjustment To train students' ability of words and speaking.To be able to help each other in communication.Exercise method.Writing and Oral practicing method.Teaching
procedure Step 1.Greeting and revision 1.Review the text of Unit 2 2.complete the sentences with which, who or that.1)The man_______we met was a cartoonist.2)He drew a dog___________had six legs.3)The cartoon and the cartoonist _________you're talking about is very famous.4)I know a teacher_______________is also a cartoonist.5)The picture____________I like best is the first one.6)Did the children watch a cartoon____________was drawn by Alice last Friday 3.Join the sentences with who, which or that.There's a Chinese artist.You must meet him.There's a Chinese artist(who)you must meet.Step 2 Language practice 1.Read through the example sentences in the box with the whole cla.2.Ask them what language point is demonstrated.Attributive Clauses(引导词的省略)Step4.Vocabulary 三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
1).complete the paage with the correct words in activity 8.2).complete the paage with the correct phrases in the box in activity 9.Step5.Grammar 1.Attributive Clauses
The cartoons(which / that)I like have lots of jokes.在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作宾语就可以省略,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作主语就不能省略,否则会造成结构混乱,影响表达.I've got a camera which has got his name on it.Perhaps it'll be a cartoon which has a happy ending.It tells the story of a monkey who leads a group of monkeys.eg.I'd love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make leons that are usually boring more interesting.2.Exercises 1.Do the exercises 1.2.3 in WB.2.多项选择.从下列ABCDE中选出符合题意的任意项.A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom(见附表)Blackboard Writing Design Attributive Clauses
The cartoons(which / that)I like have lots of jokes.在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作宾语就可以省略,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.eg.Did you go to the talk ○ the famous cartoonist gave at your school The cartoonist ○ we spoke to still uses pen and paper to make his drawings 在英语中,如果定语从句的引导词在从句中作主语就不能省略,否则会造成结构混乱,影响表达.eg.I'd love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist.He could make leons that are usually boring more interesting.Self-reflection Appendixes/Unit 1 1.But it's no laughing matter.但这不是开玩笑的事情.表示的否定强度比 Not a laughing matter.强得多.2.have a word with sb.和某人说句话.等于to talk to some one for a short time.a 与谈话中说了多少没有任何关系.比较:have words with sb.与某人吵架.3.That's a smart idea!等于That's a good idea.4.be in deep trouble.处于大麻烦/险境中.Exercises: 根据给出的汉语意思或首字母提示完成下列各题.The story has a happy ending(结局).三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
We feel that life is no laughing matter(开玩笑的事情).This isn't one of those cartoons(卡通)which make you laugh.come here and I have a word with you.Did you have any trouble finding your way here You can imagine how surprised I was.Appendixes/Unit 2 1.fan club 影迷俱乐部
2.orange-and-white 橙白相间的 black-and-white 黑白相间的 合成词作定语 3.win the heart of sb.赢得某人的心 4.in heaven 在天宫里
5.make a me 搞得乱七八糟 see a me 看到狼籍一片 me 一般以单数形式出现, e.g.You are really a me!你脏透了!What a me!真乱!
Your room is in a me!你的房间乱七八糟的.6.favourite adj.喜爱的,n.特别喜欢的人或物 7.ever since 自从,从那时到现在,从„„开始
e.g.She has been rich, ever since she met a good man.8.translate into 翻译成„,translate sth.from a language into another language.9.a series of 一系列 series的单数复数一致
Appendixes/Unit 3 定语从句中引导词/关系词的省略问题.如果引导词/关系词在从句中作宾语成份可以省去引导词/关系词,无论从句修饰的是人还是物.但是作主语不可省,否则会造成结构混乱.which 指物可作主语和宾语,that 指人指物可作主语和宾语,who 指人在正式语体中只作主语,whom 指人做宾语,但在非正式语体里界who 也可作宾语.关系代词 先行词
在从句中的作用 who 指人 做主语 whom 指人 做宾语 that 指人或物 做主语或宾语 which 指物
做主语或宾语
The cartoons(that/which)I like have lots of jokes.I like the teacher who teaches me English this term.在日常口语中,在定语从句中作宾语的引导词往往被省略,但在较正式的文字中则较少省略.三岔口初级中学英语电子教案
九年级
第 ５ 册
Exercises: 不定项选择.从下列ABCDE中选出符合题意的任意项.A.which B.that C./ D.who E.whom 1.It is the third time ______you have made the same mistake.2.The factory _______we'll visit next week is not far from here.3.Do you know the man ________ I spoke to
4.Can you lend me the book ______you talked about the other day 5.The engineer ________my father works with is about 50 years old.6.That is the office ______Lincoln once worked in.7.All the apples _______fell down from the tree were eaten up by the pigs.8.The place__________interested me most was the Children's Palace.9.The number of the people _______own cars is increasing.Module 10 Fitne
一、教学目标
1、语言知识目标 语音 词汇 朗读中停顿注意句群
ache exercise weight interest sugar tasty menu behave persuade ban educate typical
diet
fitne running weight lifting unlikely chip pasta cooking disadvantage advertise 词组 give up
bump into
语法 功能 话题 whose引导的定语从句
能用whose定语从句来描述人 以“健康”为话题。
2、语言技能目标
听 能听懂用包含所学的定语从句的口头表述，询问及其回应的听力材料。
说 能在语境中流利说出本模块的生词，能说一些有whose的定语从句 读 能读懂有关健康体育活动与饮食的短文，理解阅读材料中定语从句所表达的语义。进行一定阅读技能训练。
写 能写包含所学定语从句的句子，能结合实际写改善饮食的文章 演示与表达 能向同伴或全班讲述如何保持健康，并提出合理建议
3、学习策略目标
自主学习、有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。认知 调控 交际 资源 自学 策略 合作 学习策略 互相学习，取长补短，注意学习策略共享，将自己所搜集的信息与其他同学共享。联系、归纳等技能。观察并归纳的有Whose的定语从句结构，提高自学能力。从同伴处得到反馈，对自己在叙述及写作中的错误进行修改。学习运用恰当词语，句子描述如何保持健康。
通过其他资源获取更多有关“健康”的英语材料。
培养在词语与相应事物之间建立联想的习惯，形成话题联想的习惯。
第9篇：外研版七年级英语上册教学计划
2016年秋季七年级 英语上册教学计划
城
关
中
学
郭 妮 2016.9.2
2016年秋季七年级英语上册教学计划
城关中学 郭妮
一、指导思想
在我国的教育精神指引下,根据我县的教育教学精神,并结合我校的实际行教学情况,关心每一位学生的发展，爱岗敬业，以身作则，使学生了解英语在当今社会的重要性,增强学生世界观和人生观,使学生初步形成健全合格的中的学生,做一个对社会有用的人。
二、基本情况
这学年我担任七年级两个班的英语教学。七(11)班共有学生45人，男生 23人,女生22人。七（12）班有学生40人，男生18个,女生22个,这些学生有一定的英语基础,大部分学生基础较好。但个别学生学习态度不认真，课堂上不遵守纪律，当然也有个别学生不敢开中读,怕读错。
三、教材特点
本学期启用最新英语教材版本外研版教材，难度变小与日常生活更加密切。本册书主要介绍了日常生活的交际用语以及一些西方国家的文化背景和风俗习惯，教材通俗易懂，旨在使初一级学生基本能用英语进行简单的交流。本册书由两部分组成,即预备篇(4个module)和正式篇(10个module).本书除提供语言材料外,还配有大量插图。
四、教学目标
通过努力，力求每一位学生能开口讲英语，能用英语进行简单的会话。通过努力使大部分学生继续保持学英语的兴趣。能保持浓厚的学习英语兴趣和积极主动参与实践，以点带面，力争教学质量在全县20%。
五、具体措施
1、认真钻研教材，备好，上好每一节课，向40分钟要质量。
2、课堂上多使用英语以及直观教具,给学生创造良好的教学环境。
3、每单元测试一次，试卷全收全改，做好讲评工作。
4、提高学生的学习兴趣，发挥学生的主观能动性。
5、积极进行教学改革，提高教学质量。
六、教学进度
第一周（9月1日-9月2日）: Starter Module 1 My teacher and my friends Unit 1 Good morning, Mi Zhou.第二周（9月5日-9月9日）: Unit 2 Good morning.I’m Chen Zhou.Unit 3 This is my friend.Starter Module2 My English leon Unit 1 Open your book.Unit 2 What’s your number? Unit 3 I’m twelve.第三周（9月12日-9月14日）: Starter Module 3 My English book Unit 1 What’s this in English? Unit 2 Can you help me, please? Unit 3 What colour is it? 第四周（9月18日-9月23日）: Starter Module 4 My everyday life Unit 1 What day is it today?.Unit 2 What’s the weather like? Unit 3 What’s your favourite sport? 复习Starter Module1-Module4检测学生掌握情况
第五周（9月26日-9月30日）: Module 1 My clamates Unit 1 Nice to meet you Unit 2 I’m Wang Lingling and I’m thirteen years old.Unit 3 Language in use 第六周（10月1日-10月7日）：国庆放假 第七周（10月8日-10月14日）: Module 2 My family
Unit1 Is this your mum? Unit 2 These are my parents.Unit 3 Language in use 第八周（10月17日-10月21日）: Module 3 My school Unit 1 There are thirty students in my cla.Unit 2 The library is on the left of the playground.Unit 3 Language in use 第九周（10月24日-10月28日）: Module 4 Healthy food Unit 1 We’ve got lots of apples.Unit 2 Is your food and drink healthy? Unit 3 Language in use 第十周（10月31日-11月4日）: 复习前半学期所学内容，期中考试 第十一周（11月7日-11月11日）: Module 5 My school day.Unit 1 I love history.Unit 2 We start work at nine o’clock..Unit 3 Language in use 第十二周（11月14日-11月18日）: Revision module A 第十三周（11月21日-11月25日）: Module 6 A trip to the zoo.Unit 1 Does it eat meat ? Unit 2 The tiger lives in Asia.Unit 3 Language in use 第十四周（11月28日-12月2日）: Module 7 computers Unit 1 How do I write my homework on the computer? Unit 2 When do you use a computer? Unit 3 Language in use 第十五周（12月5日-12月9日）:
Module 8 Choosing presents.Unit 1 I always like birthday parties Unit 2 Leons start at nine o’clock.Unit 3 Language in use 第十六周（12月12日-12月16日）: Module 9 People and places.Unit 1 We’re enjoying the school trip a lot.Unit 2 They’re waiting for buses or trains.Unit 3 Language in use 第十七周（12月19日-12月23日）: Module 10 Spring Festival Unit 1 Are you getting ready for Spring Festival? Unit 2 My mother’s cleanig our house and sweeping away bad luck.Unit 3 Language in use 第十八周（12月26日-12月30日）: Revision module B 第十九周（2017年1月3日-1月6日）:总复习第二十周（2017年1月9日-1月13日）: 期末考试
第10篇：外研版八年级上册英语 外研版八年级英语上册各单元作文
外研版八年级上册英语 外研版八年级英语上册各单元作文范文
导读：就爱阅读网友为您分享以下“外研版八年级英语上册各单元作文范文”资讯，希望对您有所帮助，感谢您对的支持!八年级上册各单元话题作文范文
1、假设你应邀在明天的班会上作题为“How to study English well”的演讲。请根据以下信息写一篇80字的演讲稿。演讲稿开头已给出，不计入总词数。1.早晨起床后、晚上睡觉前大声朗读英语； 2.课余时间多听英语磁带，提高听力技能； 3.不要害怕课堂说英语，多做课堂笔记； 4.有时看一些英语电影或电视剧。
Good morning, everyone!I’m very glad to talk about how to study English well._______________________________________________________________________________ One poible version: Good morning, everyone!I’m very glad to talk about how to study English well.First of all, I think we must read English aloud in order to practice our spoken English after getting up in the morning and before going to bed in the evening.Secondly, we should do more listening practice to improve our listening skills.Thirdly, don’t be afraid to speak English in cla.Sometimes we can watch some English-language TV plays or films.It helps a lot.We should also take lots of grammar notes in cla and try to write our own sentences.I’m sure you’ll make great progre in learning English.That’s all.Thank you.2、请你介绍一下你游览北京的经历，内容如下： 1.北京在中国的北方，每年有很多人到北京来旅游。2.来过北京多次，跑遍了北京城。3.爬过长城，到过颐和园和故宫。
4．拍下了很多照片，与老外用英语交谈过。One poible version: Beijing is in the north of China and it’s the capital of China.There are many places of interest there.A lot of people come to visit Beijing every year.I have been to Beijing many times.I have traveled around Beijing.I have climbed the Great Wall.I have visited the Summer Palace and the Palace Museum.I have also had conversations with foreigners and I have taken lots of photos.3、假如你叫吴明，对航天英雄杨利伟非常羡慕和崇拜，于是给他写信。请按要求写一封60-70词左右的信。1． 10月15日我国发射“神舟”五号载人宇宙飞船。中国成为第三个能把人类送上太空的国家。2．对他表示祝贺。3．决心向他学习，长大后为祖国服务。One poible version: Dear Uncle yang, I’m sending you this letter to give you my congratulations.On October 15,2003, China sent up the first space craft.Shenzhou V into space succefully, you became the first spaceman in China.Now China has become the third country than can send a person into space.You are so great that I admire you.I muse learn from you and try to improve myself.When I grow up, I will serve our country.Yours truly, Wu Ming
4、要求：根据提示以第一人称，写一篇不少于80词的故事。
今天我们的老师告诉我们关于希望工程的事。我们知道在农村还有许多孩子没有机会上学。
下课后，我回家看了放零花钱的小盒子。我本想为自己买一个新书包。但现在我想，农村的孩子更渴望上学，于是我决定把我的钱寄给他们。
我立刻给他们写信，写完后，我去邮局，把信连同我所有的零花钱寄了出去。我希望这能对他们有帮助。
Today our teacher told us something about Project Hope.We heard that…
_______________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ One poible version: Today our teacher told us something about Project Hope.We heard that many children in the countryside still had no chance to go to school.“They are too poor to go to school,” the teacher said.After the cla, I went back home and saw the little box in which I saved my pocket money.I wanted to buy myself a new school bag.But now I thought of the country children who were eager to go to school.So I decided to send my money to them.I started to write a letter to them right away.After finishing it, I went to the post office and mailed the letter together with all my pocket money.I hope it could help the children in poor area.5、以My Musical Habits为题写一篇70词左右的短文，介绍一下你的音乐爱好,可适当扩写。内容要点包括： 1.介绍你爱好的音乐；
2.每天什么时候训练、训练多长时间；
3.你喜欢流行音乐，在上学和放学的路上你经常听MP3，也能唱很多流行歌曲； 4.有时去听音乐会。
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ One poible version: My Musical Habits I love music and I have some good music habits.I enjoy playing musical instruments, listening to music and singing songs as well.I practice playing the guitar for half an hour after supper every day.Pop music is my favourite.I often listen to MP3 on my way to school and after school.In this way, I’ve learned many popular songs.So I can sing lots of them now.And sometimes my parents take to concerts.Music makes me happy and relaxed.Music makes my life rich and colourful.Music is really important to me.6、根据中文提示和英文提示词语，写一篇意思连贯、符合逻辑的短文。所给英文提示词语必须用上。字数60～70左右。
1、昨天晚上我和妈妈出去散步。
2、在路上我遇到了一个外国人。
3、他向我询问去温泉饭店（the Hot Spring Hotel）的路。
4、我告诉他沿着路往前走，在第三个转弯处向左拐就能看见饭店。
5、他非常感谢我，我也为能帮他而感到高兴。 提示词语：go out for a walk, on the road, the way to, walk along, on the left, thank for, be happy that One poible version: Yesterday evening, I went out for a walk with my mother.On the road, we met a foreigner.He asked me the way to the Hot Spring Hotel.I told him to walk along the road and take the third turning on the left, then he could see the hotel.He thanked me very much for my help.I was happy that I could help him.7、动物是人类的朋友。而许多动物却濒临灭绝。你想拯救哪种动物？为什么？为此我们该做些什么？ One poible version: Today many animals are in danger.They’re always killed.They have no place to live in.The panda is one of the animals most in danger.They mainly live on bamboo.The area of bamboo is becoming smaller,so pandas have le and le land to live on.Baby pandas often die.The situation is becoming very serious.So we need to protect and save them.We can build enough nature reserves.The nature reserves will be bigger and the bamboo will be better.Let’s try our best to save animals in danger！
8、介绍一部你最喜欢的著作或剧作品，说说你为什么喜欢它。
One poible version: My favourite play is Hi,Ke’ai.It takes place in Beijing.It’s the story of a boy called Ke’ai.His parents would like him to become a painter or musician or scientist one day.They teach him to paint and to play the piano,but Ke’ai doesn’t enjoy these activities.He only wants to be himself.The play shows us that it is good for parents to learn to understand their children.It helps parents to think about what kids want to do.9、Betty 要来你所在的地方旅游，请你提出相关的天气信息，内容包括全年中这个时候的天气状况、近几天的天气预报、备用衣服等。One poible version: Dear Betty, I’m happy to know that you’re coming to Shandong.The best time to visit Shandong is in autumn.In spring, it’s quite windy and there can be sand storms.It’s very hot in summer but may get cooler after showers.Winter is freezing and dry, but the city is beautiful after snow.These days the weather is getting colder.Sometimes it’ll rain a little.If you come at this time, please wear more clothes and bring an umbrella.Yours, Daming.10、假如你是Mike, 下面是你们学校的一些规章制度，请写一封电子邮件向你的笔友Lucy做一下介绍。词数80左右。1.上课不能迟到； 2.课堂上保持安静； 3.见到老师要问好；
4.不许在教室里吃东西； 5.不许在课堂上听音乐、玩游戏。One poible version: Dear Lucy, Thank you for your last letter.You want to know the rules in our school.Now let me tell you.We can’t be late for cla.We can’t talk loudly in cla.We should be quiet.When we meet teachers on our way, we should greet them.We can’t eat or drink in cla.And we can’t listen to music or play games in cla.Good luck to you!Yours，Mike.11请以“Welcome to My Hometown” 为题，写一篇介绍自己家乡，宣传家乡特色的短文。不少于70词。内容包括：
1、家乡的地理位置。
2、最佳的旅游时间。
3、家乡气候如何。
4、值得游玩的地方及其原因等方面。
_______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________
第11篇：新外研版九年级上册课文翻译(含对话)
2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
Module 1 Wonders of the world Unit 1: It’s more than 2000 years old.托尼:我们给《世界奇观》节目打电话，加入讨论吧。我觉得自然奇观比人造奇观更有趣。而且我认为巨人之路是最神奇的自然奇观。
玲玲:嗯，我没有见过巨人之路，所以我不知道该不该同意你的看法。你为什么会喜欢它呢，托尼？
托尼:哦，两年前我浏览了巨人之路。它非常大，由大约4万多块石块组成，大多数石块都有六个面。巨人之路位于北爱尔兰东海岸，绵延数百米。
玲玲:听起来很神奇，但我认为非洲的维多利亚瀑布更壮观。瀑布宽约1700米，高约100米，数千米之外就能听到瀑布的巨响。
贝蒂:哇！那么大啊！但是，在我看来，人造奇观比自然奇观更激动人心。就说兵马俑吧，它们都有两千多年的历史了。
大明:我同意你的看法，贝蒂。我觉得三峡大坝也很神奇。大坝长约2300米，高185米，顶部宽15米。它为中国数百万的人口供电。
贝蒂:那现在谁来拨打热线？
Unit 2 The Grand Canyon was not just big.自然界的一大奇观
我到那里时是大清早，天下着雨。我朝东边看了看，天空变得灰蒙蒙的。我下了车，穿过一道门，沿着一条黑暗的小路前行。虽然什么也看不见，但我知道它就在那里。
大约走了一英里，小路边出现了一个陌生人。我问道：“我走的路对吗？”他知道我要去哪里。他答道：“对，五分钟后你就能到达那里。”终于，我走到一些岩石前停了下来。我朝那片岩石望过去，但是一片寂静，还是看不见它。
突然，雨停了，云散了。太阳从我身后升起，照在岩石上。地面(仿佛在随着光线)向下延伸，（逐渐）退落到下面的一条河里。我在眺望着这自然界奇观之一的大峡谷。
我俯视着距我一英里之遥的银色的科罗拉多河。即使你把世界上最高的两栋建筑物叠在一起放在谷底，它们仍就到不到了顶。然后我眺望峡谷的另一边。它大约在15英里之外，也许更远。最后，我向左右遥望，大峡谷向两边延伸, 长达200多英里。大峡谷不仅仅是大，而是巨大！
我在大峡谷伫立半小时有余，我问了自己一个问题：“大峡谷是自然界中最壮观的奇观吗？”我心中自然已有答案。你怎么认为呢？
Module 2 Public holidays
Unit 1 My family always go somewhere interesting as soon as the holiday begins.By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
托尼: 玲玲, 10月1日是中国的国庆节，对吗？
玲玲: 是的。中华人民共和国成立于1949年10月1日。从那时开始，中国人（每年）都庆祝国庆节。（国庆节时）到处都有鲜花和国旗，我们休假3天。
托尼: 这个国庆假期你有什么计划吗？
玲玲: 有。我和爸爸妈妈准备去山东省拜访一些朋友。我们会一直待在那里，直至假期结束。和朋友们在一起期间，我们会去青岛玩一天。贝蒂，你们的国庆节是什么时候呀？
贝蒂: 我们的国庆节叫独立日，在7月4日。从1777年以来，我们一直庆祝这个节日。独立日是一个公共假日，但我们只放一天假。那一天有各种各样的节日活动。这个时间是休假季节的开始，大多数人都会在七月或八月的某段时间休假。
玲玲: 那天有什么特别的事情吗？
贝蒂: 嗯，到处都可以看到美国国旗。我们通常会去一些好地方野餐。孩子们玩得可开以了。我们也可以在公园里观看乐队演奏乐曲。
大明: 托尼，你们英国也过国庆节吗？
托尼: 不，我们没有。我们放假两天庆祝圣诞节。假期一开始，我们一家就会去某人好玩的地方。
Unit 2 We have celebrated the festival since the first pioneers arrived in America.感恩节
感恩节是美国的一个节日。人们在每年十一月的 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
李老师： 大明，谁是你的英雄？你要选择谁来讲述呢？
大明： 邓亚萍！她是我的英雄，因为她是世界上最棒的乒乓选手之一，而且我喜欢打乒乓球。
李老师： 那就给我们讲讲她！
大明： 嗯，她五岁开始练球。她训练刻苦，所以后来成了一名伟大的乒乓球选手。李老师： 她赢过哪些比赛呢？
大明： 她获得过许多次世界冠军，包括四枚奥运会金牌。她24岁时退役。
李老师：后来她做了什么呢？她开始在北京读清华大学，后来到国外大学深造。刚开始的时候，她的英语并不好，她还是刻苦努力，7年后，她获得了剑桥大学的博士学位。她无论做什么，都不放弃。
李老师：真是太不可思议了！
大明： 是的。邓亚萍说她并不比任何人聪明，但她拥有非常坚强的意志。
李老师：我明白了。嗯，我觉得她不仅是一位出色的运动员，而且还是一个好学生。大明： 是的。而且北京奥运会成为世界体育运动的一次胜利，也有她的功劳。她就是最棒的！
李老师： 她是一位真正的英雄。
Unit 2 There were few doctors, so he had to work very hard on his own.我的英雄---白求恩大夫
诺曼●白求恩是中国最有名的英雄之一。他是一位加拿大医生。他来到中国，帮助中国人民并为他们而献身。
诺曼●白求恩出生于1890年。他于1916年成为一名医生，并于1936年去了西班牙，治疗那里在战争期间受伤的士兵。他很快意识到许多人因为没有尽快送往医院而濒临死亡。白求恩大夫研发了新方法来照顾病人。他发明了在医院外面和靠近交战地区使用的特殊医疗器械，这样医生就能够更快地治疗伤员。他的发明挽救了许多人的生命。
1938年，白求恩大夫来到了中国，在抗日战争期间帮助治疗伤员。那时中国医生很少，因此，他不得不独自很努力地工作。他在西班牙治疗伤员的经验在中国非常有用。他为当地的医生和护士开设培训课程，而且写书以便他们能够学习他是如何治疗病人的。
白求恩大夫经常非常辛苦地工作，不休息也不照顾自己。曾经有一次，他甚至不停地工作了69个小时，成功挽救了一百多人的生命。在1939年的一天，在手术时，他割伤了自己的手指，但他没有处理伤口，仍然继续工作。最后，他因伤去世。
白求恩大夫为中国人民所作的工作使他成为中国人民心目中的英雄。有许多关于他的书籍和电影，而且在中国和加拿大，人们现在仍然怀念他。
托尼:
Module 4 Home alone
Unit 1 I can look after myself, although it won’t be easy for me.By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
妈妈：我们是哪个车次？
爸爸：T27，到拉萨，从2号站台出发。
妈妈：贝蒂，这次拉萨会议对我们来说非常重要，但是很遗憾你不能和我们一起去。贝蒂: 我也是（很遗憾），但是我不能两周不上课。
妈妈：你记住我交待给你的所有的事了吗？特别要注意家门，在家时工关好门，离开家时要锁好门。
贝蒂: 好的，妈妈！我能照顾好自己，尽管那对我来说不那么容易。
贝蒂: 嗯，要保证每天都吃大量的新鲜水果和蔬菜。我还给你留了许多你喜欢的饼干。
贝蒂: 别担心。我能做简单的饭菜。爸爸：早上也没人叫你起床了。
贝蒂: 没事的，我的闹钟很响，肯定能把我叫醒。妈妈：我总觉得忘了什么事情，但就是想不起来。
（广播：乘坐T27次列车前往拉萨的旅客们，请马上到2号站台上车，你的火车要开了。）
贝蒂: 说的就是你们的火车！妈妈，再见！爸爸，再见！妈妈：我知道了！我还没给你留我们在拉萨的地址呢？ 贝蒂: 发短信给我吧。旅途愉快！妈妈：再见了，宝贝！
贝蒂: 再见，两周后再见了！
Unit 2 I became so bored with their orders that I wished they would leave me alone.我的“完美假期”
作为一个男孩，就像其他所有男孩一样，我想做个男子汉。但我父母为我做一切事情。实际上，他们安排了我生活中的分钟。尽管他们爱我，但我对他们有点儿满。“郑晨宇，做作业！”“练钢琴！”“关了电视！”对于他们的指令，我非常厌烦，以至于我真希望他们别管我。
哦，我的愿望实现了！尽管父母对离开我非常担心，但他们不得不出差几天。现在，我的机会来了！我终于能玩得开心了！2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
家的经历，然后我们都笑了。
Module 5 Museums
Unit 1 Don’t cro that rope.（贝蒂、玲玲和大明在博物馆三楼。）贝蒂: 多好的博物馆啊！
玲玲: 真是太棒了，对吗？ 我们去楼上的动物展厅吧。我需要一些有关研究性学习的资料。
贝蒂: 我也是。我们走吧！等一下，大明去哪里了？ 玲玲: 他在那里！他在那里干什么？
大明: 嗨，贝蒂，玲玲！快过来看看猴子展览。保安：请勿喧哗！这是违反规定的。贝蒂: 哦，不会吧！大明又惹麻烦了？
大明: 看那只猴子的尾巴！我要从这里进去„„.保安：快停下!不要越过那条绳子!你没看到这个标识吗,孩子? 禁止进入!大明: 噢!为什么不能进? 保安：因为它关闭了.玲玲: 对,大明.你看那个标识。
大明: 哦，没错。太不好了！嗯，那我就拍张照片„„ 保安：对不起。请勿拍照, 看到了吗? 大明: 这个博物馆哪来这么多规章制度。难怪这个地方没什么人呢！贝蒂: 大明，不能没有礼貌。玲玲: 哦不！
贝蒂: 怎么了，玲玲？
玲玲: 我的手机！我的手机不见了！哦不！我该怎么办？
保安：不要担心，女士！到楼下失物招领处去。也许手机在那里。
玲玲: 那可是一部新手机啊！我一定要找到它，要不然妈妈会处罚我的！贝蒂: 我想没事的，玲玲。我们现在去看看。大明：是的，我们下楼！
Unit 2 If you ever go to London , make sure you visit the Science Museum.伦敦科学博物馆
欢迎来到伦敦最友好的博物馆。大多数博物馆都禁止喧哗、乱跑，而且禁止触摸任何东西。但是科学博物馆不一样。。。这里是嘈杂的！人们谈论他们在这里能看到和能做的事情。博物馆内也有些噪声很大的机器。如果你想要得到关于科学的所有问题的答案，你来对地方了。
我喜欢参观三楼和四楼的展厅。你不仅可以了解数学、物理学和化学知识，而且还能了解通讯和环境知识。例如，你能弄清楚人们是如何从地下挖煤并用它来创造能量的。在一个展厅里他们甚至会解释X光是如何让你看到你身体内部的。
四楼的发射台是最受欢迎的展厅，它也是我的最爱，因为有许多物理实验可以做。例
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
如，如果想把一个袋子装满沙子，你就得操控一种带轮子的运输车，并把车移动到正确的位置。你也能够弄清楚人们是如何到太空旅行并返回的。
在五楼和六楼，你可以了解过去的药物是什么样的。如果你把过去的药物也现在的药物作一下比较，下次你去看医生的时候会感觉非常幸运！
对各个年龄段的人来说科学博物馆是有趣的。在那里，你总能发现新的东西并玩得很快乐。博物馆免费进入，所以你可以在那里待几分钟或者一整天。它每天从上午十点到下午六点开放。所以如果你去伦敦的话，一定要参观科学博物馆。它是全世界我最喜欢的博物馆。
Module 6 Problems
Unit 1 If I start after dinner, I’ll finish it before I go to bed.爸爸: 托尼，你又在弹吉它，你家庭作业完成了吗？
托尼: 没，还没有，但是今天作业不多。如果我晚饭后开始做，睡觉前肯定能做完。而且，你不是想让我学一门乐器吗？
爸爸: 我想让你养成一回家就做家庭作业的习惯。如果你现在开始做，晚饭前你就能做完了。
托尼: 是的，但是放学后我想休息一下。我还想去图书馆做点志愿者工作。爸爸: 那么你现在不做作业了？
托尼: 不做，没有必要现在做。我迟点儿再做。
爸爸: 真遗憾！我真的认为你不应该如此频繁地去图书馆。托尼: 为什么？我可以在图书馆干活儿，而且还能在那里看书。
爸爸: 托尼，这不行。如果你老是做这些与学习无关的事，你就没时间学习了。托尼: 你的意思是不想让我去社区服务，不让我增加对世界的认知吗？
爸爸: 我不是这个意思。但你要权衡哪件事情最重要。我不想让你考试不及格。托尼: 但是„„
爸爸: 没完成家庭作业之前,你什么也不能干。我很抱歉,但这是我的最终决定。
Unit 2 If you tell him the truth now , you will show that you are honest.致戴安娜
你有困难吗？那就给《新标准杂志》的戴安娜写信，寻求她的建议吧。亲爱的戴安娜：
上周，我的朋友大卫带着一个新的电脑游戏到我家，请求在我爸爸的电脑上玩游戏。我很担心，因为在使用爸爸的电脑之前应该先问他一下。他用电脑工作，我只能用它来做作业。原因是：他认为如果我在电脑上玩游戏的话，电脑会出故障。
哦，当爸爸不在家时，我们决定试着玩一下大卫的游戏。我们把它复制到电脑上，我们玩完游戏后，把它从电脑上删除了。然而，当我重新打开电脑，检查是否一切可好时，爸爸的一些文件不见了。后来，昨天晚上，爸爸使用电脑时，他非常生气。他哪里都找不到那
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
些文件了。它们是很重要的文件。
我没告诉他关于电脑游戏的事，因为我不想让他生我的气。现在我感觉难受。我不确定电脑工程师是否能把文件找回来。我应该告诉他关于电脑游戏的事吗？我应该花钱修理电脑吗？
你的朋友，史蒂夫
亲爱的史蒂夫：
噢，天哪！你犯了两个错误。太糟糕了，当你爸爸告诉你不要用他的电脑玩游戏时，你却用它玩了。更糟糕的是，你没告诉他关于那件事。如果你现在告诉他真相，他会生你的气，但至少能显示出你是诚实的。
你应该向你爸爸道歉，也要付修理电脑的费用。如果你主动放弃你的零花钱，你爸爸会意识到你的歉意。
记住下一次要和大卫踢足球，不要再玩电脑游戏！
最好的祝愿，戴安娜
Module 7 Great books Unit 1 We’re still influenced by Confucius’s ideas.杰克逊先生：你好，贝蒂。怎么了？
贝蒂：我想参加者一个网络小组，讨论一些伟大的作家写的名著。杰克逊先生：那么，你认为伟大的作家都有谁啊？ 贝蒂：嗯，可能有孔子和萨士比亚吧。杰克逊先生：真的吗？我承认他们都很伟大，因为至今还有很多人在阅读他们的著作。但是我更愿意把孔子描述为一位教育家和思想家，而非作家。他是一位非常睿智的人。为了参与讨论，你们都得做些什么啊？
贝蒂：嗯，我们每人要读一本自己喜欢的书，并写一篇书评，以便参与讨论。
杰克逊先生：我明白了。现在，孔子的思想仍然在影响着我们，萨士比亚的戏剧对我们来说也仍然很有意义。人们一直以来并且将来仍然会阅读这些名著作。顺便问一下，你觉得19世纪美国伟大的作家马克.吐温怎么样啊? 贝蒂：他是一位重要的作家，但我觉得他不像孔子和萨士比亚那么有名。杰克逊先生：对，但他的小说仍然很受欢迎。他的一本小说《汤姆.索耶历险记》是我非常喜欢的。
贝蒂：太好了！那你为什么不加入讨论并向我们介绍一下它呢？
Unit 2 It is still read and loved.>的书评
贝蒂金
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
我最喜欢的名著之一是马克吐温写的>。故事以19世纪美国密苏里州圣彼得堡镇为背景。它讲述了一个经历了许多冒险的男孩的一些令人激动的故事。
书的主人公汤姆和他的波莉阿姨一起生活。他是一个活泼聪明的男孩。他不喜欢人们告诉他做什么，所以他总是遇到麻烦。他和他最好的朋友哈克„芬恩逃到密西西比河中部的一个岛上。汤姆遇到更多的麻烦，因为一个名叫印 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
托尼: 我不同意！这不公平！（托尼生气地离开了。）
玲玲: 记住要传球，而不是踢球，托尼！
贝蒂: 他真的生我们的气了，所以会全力以赴去赢得这场比赛来证明我们错了。玲玲: 干得好，贝蒂！我太希望他们这次能赢了。我们一定到场为他们加油。
Unit 2 He was invited to competitions around the world.刘翔--为赢而战
对刘翔来说，作为一位体育英雄的生活开始于2004年。首先，他被邀请参加世界各地的比赛，然后他被选人雅典奥运会归家队，并赢得一枚金牌。
一开始刘翔并不是一名成功的运动员。他于1983年7月13日出生于上海，当他很年轻的时候就开始训练，在4年级时，他去了上海普陀区的体校。期初，刘被鼓励训练调高。在1998年刘翔跨栏赛跑的能力被孙海平注意到了，孙海平后来成为他的教练。2001年创立了一个特殊的项目，用来帮助年轻运动员。刘翔就在他们之中。他的赛跑被记录，并且他被和世界上最好的体育明星作比较。孙海平用这些信息改变对刘翔的训练方法。
在2001年5月，刘翔在对日本赢得了他收个国际110米跨栏比赛。在2004年，他为中国赢得了 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
如果一定要借给其他人的话，你要告诉他们如何正确使用它。
托尼：我保证。
Unit 2 Will books be replaced by the Internet ?
书籍将被因特网取代吗？
每天早上，我爸爸在去上班的路上买份报纸。每天，我在课堂上打开书开始上课。每天晚上，我妈妈都在家浏览报纸。而且每天夜晚之前，都看着卧室墙上大卫.贝克汉姆和姚明的照片。我们能想象没有报纸和印刷术的生活吗？
纸是大约2000年前在中国被首次创造出来的。在它的发明之后，人们开始在纸上写字来制书。在那个年代，书是靠手工制作的，一次只能制作一本。因此，书籍又少，价格又贵。所以，很少有人有机会学者读书。
印刷术是在中国隋唐时期发明的。后来，印刷术的发展使更快更便宜地制造书籍成为可能。书的交易形成了，更多的人学者读书，知识和思想比以前传播得更快了。在某种程度上，我们把纸和印刷术的发明与20世纪因特网的引入相媲美。
尽管因特网还在初期，但它发展很快，而且可能比印刷术变得更强大。在因特网上比在书籍中更大的信息量会以更多样化的形式被存储。使用网络连接的人比在印刷品中寻找信息的人能更容易地找到信息。我们用来阅读信息的机器现在又小又轻，经常比一本单独的书更小更轻。
现在电脑和因特网在教室中被使用。报纸和杂志已经能够在线阅读。那么传统的印刷术未来的方向是什么？书籍将被因特网取代吗？让我们拭目以待。
Module 10 Australia
Unit 1 I have some photos that I took in Australia last year.托尼：爸爸，我需要你的帮助。老师让我们选择一个我们想去的国家，想像我们就在那里，然后给家里的父母写一封信。我选择了澳大利亚，我该如何写呢？
爸爸：别担心！我有一些去年在澳大利亚拍的照片，也许可以帮到你。我们来看一看吧。这块岩石叫做艾尔斯岩，位于澳大利亚中部。据当地人说，这是一个奇特而具有魔力的地方。
托尼：哦，看起来很大啊！它有多高？
爸爸：348米。这是悉尼歌剧院。它就像一艘巨大的帆船，三面环水。这一张是大堡礁。
托尼：它是位于澳大利亚东北海岸吗？
爸爸：是的，它有2600多公里长。它是一个伟大的自然奇观。这里还有一些我的澳大利亚朋友的照片。他们是牧羊的农民。他们戴着能赶走苍蝇的特制的帽子。他们拿着的剪刀是用来剪羊毛的。你知道许多澳大利亚人来自英国吗？
托尼：是的，当然了。那就是他们为什么说英语的原因。您在那儿的时候记日记了吗？ 爸爸：记了，你可以读读。
托尼：太棒了！你不喜欢澳大利亚的哪些方面呢？
爸爸：我讨厌到处都有蚂蚁。我得把它们从我衣服上掸掉，特别是裤子上。托尼：在您的裤子上有蚂蚁！太有趣了！
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
爸爸：当时可并不有趣！
Unit 2 The game that they like most is Australian football.亲爱的妈妈、爸爸：
我现在是在澳大利亚的中部给你们写这封信。现在，我们在艾尔斯岩附近。在 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
大明：好照片，我觉得你很可能赢。
Unit 2 The photo which we liked best was taken by Zhao Min.摄影比赛结果
今晚我非常高兴在这里宣读这次摄影比赛的获胜者。我们对本年度的比赛感到非常满意。与往年相比，我们收到了更多的(参赛)照片。尽管所有的照片都很出色，但是我们只能遗憾地说我们不能给每个人都颁奖。
获得大自然主题将的是15岁的李伟。李伟拍的是香山公园的树。他的照片展示了山上不同的色彩。
城市与人那一组中我们最喜欢的照片是赵敏拍摄的。赵敏只有12岁。她的照片展示的是一个刮大风的夜晚一个冲过马路的人。这个人是一个穿着女衬衫和裙子的漂亮女孩，她在保护她的书免受阵雨淋湿。
音乐类最佳照片是何忠拍摄的。他拍摄的疯狂足迹乐队的照片表现了歌手贝基•王与乐队在一个音乐会上的表演。何忠设法展示了这支大的新乐队的动感与声音，以及他们的粉丝所感受到的快乐阳光。
展示北京和英国剑桥的一组照片获得了“家长与异乡”主题类奖。他们展示了一个小旅行者来我们国家的一些经历，和他对家乡的一些回忆。获胜者是托尼•史密斯！
祝贺我们的获胜者，并感谢所有的参赛者。现在让我们欢迎我们的校长向获胜者颁奖！
Module 12 Save our world
Unit 1 If everyone starts to do something, the world will be saved.玲玲：上完有关环境的课后，我对未来非常担心。污染是我们的大敌，我们必须和它作斗争。如果河流受到污染，农民就不能用河水去浇灌庄稼。
托尼：在有些地方，来自工厂的污染遍布城市和村庄。污染使人生病，甚至可以让人丧命。污染危及我们的健康。
贝蒂：路上的车非常多，这些车过多地耗油，也造成了污染。大明：但是我们仅仅是学生，对这些工厂和汽车无能为力。
贝蒂：谈论我们不能做的事是没有意义的。我们应该想一些我们能做的事。大明：比如说„„? 玲玲：你认为我们可以使我们的学校变成绿色学校吗？ 大明：什么是绿色学校？ 玲玲：在绿色学校里，每个班都收集可循环再生或再利用的废物。然后学校卖掉它们，筹集到的资金可以用来帮助贫困地区的学生。
大明：好主意！
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
贝蒂：绿色学校的学生也学到了在家中节约能源和回收再利用的方法，这意味着减少浪费。
托尼：这是个好主意。尽管现在污染很严重，我认为还是有希望的。如果大家都开始采取一些措施，世界将会得到拯救。
Unit 2 Repeat these three words daily: reduce, reuse and recycle.怎样才能变成“绿色”？
你有多“绿色”？回答下列问题，找出答案。你步行或骑自行车去上学吗？ 你仅仅因为时髦而买新衣服吗？ 离开房间时你关灯吗？
购物时你自己带包而不是要塑料袋吗？
你买塑料饮料吗？瓶子空了时你怎样处理它们？ 你将废品分成可回收利用的和丢弃的吗？
我们都需要一个健康的环境，但我们每天制造废物，这对我们的环境是有害的。每天重复这三个单词:减少、重复利用和回收利用。
减少
减少意思是“少用”。不要浪费东西。这节约钱并造成更少的污染。不要点多余你能吃完的食物。你不需要灯时关掉它们。买新东西前，想想是否真有必要，因为也许旧的恰恰一样好！
重复利用
重复利用的意思是“再使用”。尽可能长时间地使用东西。照料它们以便他们会持续使用。如果可能，修理它们。不要扔掉它们而买新的。不要用纸杯或纸袋。用陶瓷杯子和布包更好，因为它们可以用许多次。
回收利用一起是“将某件东西变成别的东西再利用”。虽然将一些东西变成别的东西需要能量，但是那比扔掉或者烧掉它们好。我们每年扔掉许多垃圾，我们必须改变。将你的垃圾分成塑料、玻璃、纸和橡胶。为整个社区制定一项回收利用政策。购买像再生纸之类的产品来帮助节约树木。
我们不能期待立竿见影的变化，但是让我们从今天就开始采取这些简单的措施吧，以便我们将来为我们的子孙拯救世界。
By wlonely
第12篇：新外研版九年级上册课文翻译(含对话)
M1U1 托尼:我们给《世界奇观》节目打电话，加入讨论吧。我觉得自然奇观比人造奇观更有趣。而且我认为巨人之路是最神奇的自然奇观。
玲玲:嗯，我没有见过巨人之路，所以我不知道该不该同意你的看法。你为什么会喜欢它呢，托尼？ 托尼:哦，两年前我浏览了巨人之路。它非常大，由大约4万多块石块组成，大多数石块都有六个面。巨人之路位于北爱尔兰东海岸，绵延数百米。
玲玲:听起来很神奇，但我认为非洲的维多利亚瀑布更壮观。瀑布宽约1700米，高约100米，数千米之外就能听到瀑布的巨响。
贝蒂:哇！那么大啊！但是，在我看来，人造奇观比自然奇观更激动人心。就说兵马俑吧，它们都有两千多年的历史了。
大明:我同意你的看法，贝蒂。我觉得三峡大坝也很神奇。大坝长约2300米，高185米，顶部宽15米。它为中国数百万的人口供电。
贝蒂:那现在谁来拨打热线？
M1U2 自然界的一大奇观
我到那里时是大清早，天下着雨。我朝东边看了看，天空变得灰蒙蒙的。我下了车，穿过一道门，沿着一条黑暗的小路前行。虽然什么也看不见，但我知道它就在那里。
大约走了一英里，小路边出现了一个陌生人。我问道：“我走的路对吗？”他知道我要去哪里。他答道：“对，五分钟后你就能到达那里。”终于，我走到一些岩石前停了下来。我朝那片岩石望过去，但是一片寂静，还是看不见它。
突然，雨停了，云散了。太阳从我身后升起，照在岩石上。地面(仿佛在随着光线)向下延伸，（逐渐）退落到下面的一条河里。我在眺望着这自然界奇观之一的大峡谷。
我俯视着距我一英里之遥的银色的科罗拉多河。即使你把世界上最高的两栋建筑物叠在一起放在谷底，它们仍就到不到了顶。然后我眺望峡谷的另一边。它大约在15英里之外，也许更远。最后，我向左右遥望，大峡谷向两边延伸, 长达200多英里。大峡谷不仅仅是大，而是巨大！
我在大峡谷伫立半小时有余，我问了自己一个问题：“大峡谷是自然界中最壮观的奇观吗？”我心中自然已有答案。你怎么认为呢？
M2U1 托尼: 玲玲, 10月1日是中国的国庆节，对吗？
玲玲: 是的。中华人民共和国成立于1949年10月1日。从那时开始，中国人（每年）都庆祝国庆节。（国庆节时）到处都有鲜花和国旗，我们休假3天。托尼: 这个国庆假期你有什么计划吗？
玲玲: 有。我和爸爸妈妈准备去山东省拜访一些朋友。我们会一直待在那里，直至假期结束。和朋友们在一起期间，我们会去青岛玩一天。贝蒂，你们的国庆节是什么时候呀？
贝蒂: 我们的国庆节叫独立日，在7月4日。从1777年以来，我们一直庆祝这个节日。独立日是一个公共假日，但我们只放一天假。那一天有各种各样的节日活动。这个时间是休假季节的开始，大多数人都会在七月或八月的某段时间休假。玲玲: 那天有什么特别的事情吗？
贝蒂: 嗯，到处都可以看到美国国旗。我们通常会去一些好地方野餐。孩子们玩得可开以了。我们也可以在公园里观看乐队演奏乐曲。大明: 托尼，你们英国也过国庆节吗？
托尼: 不，我们没有。我们放假两天庆祝圣诞节。假期一开始，我们一家就会去某人好玩的地方。
M2U2感恩节
感恩节是美国的一个节日。人们在每年十一月的第四个星期四庆祝它。它是家人和朋友共进特殊晚餐的时刻。人们发表简短的致辞，为食物而感恩。
自首批来自英格兰的拓荒者在17世纪乘船抵达美洲大陆以来，我们就一直庆祝这个节日。在横渡大西洋时，他们当中的许多人都死在途中。到达美洲后，他们所渡过的第一个冬天比英国以往的任何一个冬季都要恶劣。当地人，也就是美洲印第安人，教这些拓荒者们如何种植玉米。第二年，他们聚在一起品尝新收获的食物，一起欢庆丰收。
今天我们仍然用传统的晚餐庆祝感恩节。厨房总是我们家最拥挤的房间，因为我们都帮着准备晚餐。我们摆放餐具，晚餐开始前，我父亲感谢食物，我们用这样的方式在记住我们为什么庆祝这个节日。我们通常会吃很多，毕竟一年只有一次！晚餐后我们经常谈论很多，也讲故事。当这些都结束后，所有人都帮着洗餐具。
这个节日是旅行非常频繁的时候，因为这个时候朋友、家人都相聚来庆祝节日。在节日期间还有很多其他可看可做的事情。我们住在纽约市，所以去观看梅西感恩节大游行。大游行沿着几条街道进行，在著名的梅西百货公司结束。感恩节是圣诞季的开始，我们开始逛街购买礼物。足球在感恩节也是重要的，因为有许多球队进行比赛。和许多美国人一样，我们通常在电视上观看比赛，尽享乐趣。M3U1 李老师： 大明，谁是你的英雄？你要选择谁来讲述呢？
大明： 邓亚萍！她是我的英雄，因为她是世界上最棒的乒乓选手之一，而且我喜欢打乒乓球。李老师： 那就给我们讲讲她！
大明： 嗯，她五岁开始练球。她训练刻苦，所以后来成了一名伟大的乒乓球选手。李老师： 她赢过哪些比赛呢？
大明： 她获得过许多次世界冠军，包括四枚奥运会金牌。她24岁时退役。
李老师：后来她做了什么呢？她开始在北京读清华大学，后来到国外大学深造。刚开始的时候，她的英语并不好，她还是刻苦努力，7年后，她获得了剑桥大学的博士学位。她无论做什么，都不放弃。李老师：真是太不可思议了！
大明： 是的。邓亚萍说她并不比任何人聪明，但她拥有非常坚强的意志。
李老师：我明白了。嗯，我觉得她不仅是一位出色的运动员，而且还是一个好学生。
大明： 是的。而且北京奥运会成为世界体育运动的一次胜利，也有她的功劳。她就是最棒的！李老师： 她是一位真正的英雄。M3U2 诺曼●白求恩是中国最有名的英雄之一。他是一位加拿大医生。他来到中国，帮助中国人民并为他们而献身。
诺曼●白求恩出生于1890年。他于1916年成为一名医生，并于1936年去了西班牙，治疗那里在战争期间受伤的士兵。他很快意识到许多人因为没有尽快送往医院而濒临死亡。白求恩大夫研发了新方法来照顾病人。他发明了在医院外面和靠近交战地区使用的特殊医疗器械，这样医生就能够更快地治疗伤员。他的发明挽救了许多人的生命。
1938年，白求恩大夫来到了中国，在抗日战争期间帮助治疗伤员。那时中国医生很少，因此，他不得不独自很努力地工作。他在西班牙治疗伤员的经验在中国非常有用。他为当地的医生和护士开设培训课程，而且写书以便他们能够学习他是如何治疗病人的。
白求恩大夫经常非常辛苦地工作，不休息也不照顾自己。曾经有一次，他甚至不停地工作了69个小时，成功挽救了一百多人的生命。在1939年的一天，在手术时，他割伤了自己的手指，但他没有处理伤口，仍然继续工作。最后，他因伤去世。
白求恩大夫为中国人民所作的工作使他成为中国人民心目中的英雄。有许多关于他的书籍和电影，而且在中国和加拿大，人们现在仍然怀念他。M4U1 妈妈：我们是哪个车次？
爸爸：T27，到拉萨，从2号站台出发。
妈妈：贝蒂，这次拉萨会议对我们来说非常重要，但是很遗憾你不能和我们一起去。贝蒂: 我也是（很遗憾），但是我不能两周不上课。
妈妈：你记住我交待给你的所有的事了吗？特别要注意家门，在家时工关好门，离开家时要锁好门。贝蒂: 好的，妈妈！我能照顾好自己，尽管那对我来说不那么容易。
贝蒂: 嗯，要保证每天都吃大量的新鲜水果和蔬菜。我还给你留了许多你喜欢的饼干。贝蒂: 别担心。我能做简单的饭菜。爸爸：早上也没人叫你起床了。
贝蒂: 没事的，我的闹钟很响，肯定能把我叫醒。妈妈：我总觉得忘了什么事情，但就是想不起来。
（广播：乘坐T27次列车前往拉萨的旅客们，请马上到2号站台上车，你的火车要开了。）贝蒂: 说的就是你们的火车！妈妈，再见！爸爸，再见！妈妈：我知道了！我还没给你留我们在拉萨的地址呢？ 贝蒂: 发短信给我吧。旅途愉快！妈妈：再见了，宝贝！贝蒂: 再见，两周后再见了！
M4U2 作为一个男孩，就像其他所有男孩一样，我想做个男子汉。但我父母为我做一切事情。实际上，他们安排了我生活中的分钟。尽管他们爱我，但我对他们有点儿满。“郑晨宇，做作业！”“练钢琴！”“关了电视！”对于他们的指令，我非常厌烦，以至于我真希望他们别管我。
哦，我的愿望实现了！尽管父母对离开我非常担心，但他们不得不出差几天。现在，我的机会来了！我终于能玩得开心了！第一天，我一放学回到家，就高兴地把书包扔到沙发上，吃了许多点心。然后在电视上尽情地欣赏了一部精彩的电影。在那之后，我玩电脑游戏。我非常喜欢那些游戏，以至于一直玩到午夜。
第二天早上，我很晚才醒来。我没吃早饭就匆忙去上学，但还是迟到了。老师向我要作业，但我没法交上。肚子里空空的，我不能喝同学们打篮球！在学校一整天，我感觉又累又困。
当我到家时，我尽力做些米饭，却把饭烧糊了。当我做饭时，甚至还摔坏了爸爸的杯子。我发现自己连简单的饭菜都做不好，我开始感觉孤独了。我想要爸爸妈妈赶快回家。妈妈做的饭菜非常好吃，并确保我从没忘记过作业。爸爸总是帮我解决难题，而且当我不高兴时，还给我讲些滑稽的笑话。那时我意识到，独自在家并不总是完美的。
当父母回家时，他们发现我会做饭和整理家务了，很高兴。我告诉了他们我独自在家的经历，然后我们都笑了。
M5U1（贝蒂、玲玲和大明在博物馆三楼。）贝蒂: 多好的博物馆啊！
玲玲: 真是太棒了，对吗？ 我们去楼上的动物展厅吧。我需要一些有关研究性学习的资料。贝蒂: 我也是。我们走吧！等一下，大明去哪里了？ 玲玲: 他在那里！他在那里干什么？
大明: 嗨，贝蒂，玲玲！快过来看看猴子展览。保安：请勿喧哗！这是违反规定的。贝蒂: 哦，不会吧！大明又惹麻烦了？
大明: 看那只猴子的尾巴！我要从这里进去…….保安：快停下!不要越过那条绳子!你没看到这个标识吗,孩子? 禁止进入!大明: 噢!为什么不能进? 保安：因为它关闭了.玲玲: 对,大明.你看那个标识。
大明: 哦，没错。太不好了！嗯，那我就拍张照片…… 保安：对不起。请勿拍照, 看到了吗? 大明: 这个博物馆哪来这么多规章制度。难怪这个地方没什么人呢！贝蒂: 大明，不能没有礼貌。玲玲: 哦不！贝蒂: 怎么了，玲玲？
玲玲: 我的手机！我的手机不见了！哦不！我该怎么办？
保安：不要担心，女士！到楼下失物招领处去。也许手机在那里。玲玲: 那可是一部新手机啊！我一定要找到它，要不然妈妈会处罚我的！贝蒂: 我想没事的，玲玲。我们现在去看看。大明：是的，我们下楼！
M5U2 欢迎来到伦敦最友好的博物馆。大多数博物馆都禁止喧哗、乱跑，而且禁止触摸任何东西。但是科学博物馆不一样。。。这里是嘈杂的！人们谈论他们在这里能看到和能做的事情。博物馆内也有些噪声很大的机器。如果你想要得到关于科学的所有问题的答案，你来对地方了。
我喜欢参观三楼和四楼的展厅。你不仅可以了解数学、物理学和化学知识，而且还能了解通讯和环境知识。例如，你能弄清楚人们是如何从地下挖煤并用它来创造能量的。在一个展厅里他们甚至会解释X光是如何让你看到你身体内部的。
四楼的发射台是最受欢迎的展厅，它也是我的最爱，因为有许多物理实验可以做。例如，如果想把一个袋子装满沙子，你就得操控一种带轮子的运输车，并把车移动到正确的位置。你也能够弄清楚人们是如何到太空旅行并返回的。
在五楼和六楼，你可以了解过去的药物是什么样的。如果你把过去的药物也现在的药物作一下比较，下次你去看医生的时候会感觉非常幸运！
对各个年龄段的人来说科学博物馆是有趣的。在那里，你总能发现新的东西并玩得很快乐。博物馆免费进入，所以你可以在那里待几分钟或者一整天。它每天从上午十点到下午六点开放。所以如果你去伦敦的话，一定要参观科学博物馆。它是全世界我最喜欢的博物馆。M6U1 爸爸: 托尼，你又在弹吉它，你家庭作业完成了吗？
托尼: 没，还没有，但是今天作业不多。如果我晚饭后开始做，睡觉前肯定能做完。而且，你不是想让我学一门乐器吗？
爸爸: 我想让你养成一回家就做家庭作业的习惯。如果你现在开始做，晚饭前你就能做完了。托尼: 是的，但是放学后我想休息一下。我还想去图书馆做点志愿者工作。爸爸: 那么你现在不做作业了？
托尼: 不做，没有必要现在做。我迟点儿再做。
爸爸: 真遗憾！我真的认为你不应该如此频繁地去图书馆。托尼: 为什么？我可以在图书馆干活儿，而且还能在那里看书。
爸爸: 托尼，这不行。如果你老是做这些与学习无关的事，你就没时间学习了。托尼: 你的意思是不想让我去社区服务，不让我增加对世界的认知吗？ 爸爸: 我不是这个意思。但你要权衡哪件事情最重要。我不想让你考试不及格。托尼: 但是……
爸爸: 没完成家庭作业之前,你什么也不能干。我很抱歉,但这是我的最终决定。
M6U2 致戴安娜
你有困难吗？那就给《新标准杂志》的戴安娜写信，寻求她的建议吧。亲爱的戴安娜：
上周，我的朋友大卫带着一个新的电脑游戏到我家，请求在我爸爸的电脑上玩游戏。我很担心，因为在使用爸爸的电脑之前应该先问他一下。他用电脑工作，我只能用它来做作业。原因是：他认为如果我在电脑上玩游戏的话，电脑会出故障。
哦，当爸爸不在家时，我们决定试着玩一下大卫的游戏。我们把它复制到电脑上，我们玩完游戏后，把它从电脑上删除了。然而，当我重新打开电脑，检查是否一切可好时，爸爸的一些文件不见了。后来，昨天晚上，爸爸使用电脑时，他非常生气。他哪里都找不到那些文件了。它们是很重要的文件。
我没告诉他关于电脑游戏的事，因为我不想让他生我的气。现在我感觉难受。我不确定电脑工程师是否能把文件找回来。我应该告诉他关于电脑游戏的事吗？我应该花钱修理电脑吗？
你的朋友，史蒂夫 亲爱的史蒂夫：
噢，天哪！你犯了两个错误。太糟糕了，当你爸爸告诉你不要用他的电脑玩游戏时，你却用它玩了。更糟糕的是，你没告诉他关于那件事。如果你现在告诉他真相，他会生你的气，但至少能显示出你是诚实的。你应该向你爸爸道歉，也要付修理电脑的费用。如果你主动放弃你的零花钱，你爸爸会意识到你的歉意。记住下一次要和大卫踢足球，不要再玩电脑游戏！
最好的祝愿，戴安娜
M7U1 杰克逊先生：你好，贝蒂。怎么了？
贝蒂：我想参加者一个网络小组，讨论一些伟大的作家写的名著。杰克逊先生：那么，你认为伟大的作家都有谁啊？ 贝蒂：嗯，可能有孔子和萨士比亚吧。
杰克逊先生：真的吗？我承认他们都很伟大，因为至今还有很多人在阅读他们的著作。但是我更愿意把孔子描述为一位教育家和思想家，而非作家。他是一位非常睿智的人。为了参与讨论，你们都得做些什么啊？ 贝蒂：嗯，我们每人要读一本自己喜欢的书，并写一篇书评，以便参与讨论。
杰克逊先生：我明白了。现在，孔子的思想仍然在影响着我们，萨士比亚的戏剧对我们来说也仍然很有意义。人们一直以来并且将来仍然会阅读这些名著作。顺便问一下，你觉得19世纪美国伟大的作家马克.吐温怎么样啊? 贝蒂：他是一位重要的作家，但我觉得他不像孔子和萨士比亚那么有名。
杰克逊先生：对，但他的小说仍然很受欢迎。他的一本小说《汤姆.索耶历险记》是我非常喜欢的。贝蒂：太好了！那你为什么不加入讨论并向我们介绍一下它呢？
M7U2 >的书评 贝蒂金
我最喜欢的名著之一是马克吐温写的>。故事以19世纪美国密苏里州圣彼得堡镇为背景。它讲述了一个经历了许多冒险的男孩的一些令人激动的故事。
书的主人公汤姆和他的波莉阿姨一起生活。他是一个活泼聪明的男孩。他不喜欢人们告诉他做什么，所以他总是遇到麻烦。他和他最好的朋友哈克„芬恩逃到密西西比河中部的一个岛上。汤姆遇到更多的麻烦，因为一个名叫印第安人乔的坏人正在找他。后来，汤姆和另一位朋友贝基逃出山洞。他还找到了印第安人乔的宝盒并把它带走了。
书中我最喜欢的部分是汤姆和哈克在密西西比河岛上冒险的那部分。起初，他们很高兴。但是当他们听说大家都以为他们死了时，他们感到很难过，所以他们回家了。当他们看到他们的家人和邻居们来到教堂的葬礼上时，他们藏起来看了一会 然后，汤姆和哈克突然出现。刚开始，大家看到他们都很惊讶，但是发现他们还活着(每个人都)很高兴。
> 是一部名著。它不仅仅是一个冒险故事。马克„吐温是在1876年写的这个故事。它描写了那时美国南部各州人们的生活。它讲述了年轻人如何成长，人们如何彼此关爱以及坏人如何为他们的行为受到惩罚的故事。它是用日常英语写成的，对话听起来特别真实。如今，它仍被全世界的人阅读和喜爱，并且它被认为是最伟大的美国小说之一。
M8U1 玲玲: 你好, 托尼!你看起来很累。
托尼: 对。我正在训练，为下周的那场重要比赛做准备。贝蒂: 你们和哪个队比赛？ 托尼: HAS。玲玲: HAS代表什么？ 托尼: 海淀全明星队。
贝蒂: 噢，是的。这将是一场艰难的比赛。上次比赛中他们不是把你们打败了吗？ 托尼: 是的，打败了。但是…… 玲玲: 比分是多少？
贝蒂: 如果我没有记错的话，海淀全明星98分，北京国际巨人52分。
托尼: 但是大明上次没有被选上参加比赛。那真是个糟糕的决定。我们没有他打不好比赛。玲玲: 那可不是借口！
托尼: 但是现在大明回来了。这个赛季两只球队没有多大差异。贝蒂: 比赛什么时候进行？
托尼: 下周六中午。如果你们想有好座位的话，你们应该在11点半之前来。你们来吗？ 贝蒂: 我不确定。你认为他们会赢吗，玲玲？
玲玲: 绝对不可能！今年你们和海淀全明星队打过多少场比赛？ 托尼: 嗯，大概三场。贝蒂: 那他们赢过几次呢？ 托尼: 呃，几乎都是他们获胜。
贝蒂: 不对！所有的比赛他们都获胜了！面对事实吧，托尼！你们没有机会了！托尼: 我不同意！这不公平！（托尼生气地离开了。）
玲玲: 记住要传球，而不是踢球，托尼！
贝蒂: 他真的生我们的气了，所以会全力以赴去赢得这场比赛来证明我们错了。玲玲: 干得好，贝蒂！我太希望他们这次能赢了。我们一定到场为他们加油。
M8U2 刘翔--为赢而战
对刘翔来说，作为一位体育英雄的生活开始于2004年。首先，他被邀请参加世界各地的比赛，然后他被选人雅典奥运会归家队，并赢得一枚金牌。
一开始刘翔并不是一名成功的运动员。他于1983年7月13日出生于上海，当他很年轻的时候就开始训练，在4年级时，他去了上海普陀区的体校。期初，刘被鼓励训练调高。在1998年刘翔跨栏赛跑的能力被孙海平注意到了，孙海平后来成为他的教练。2001年创立了一个特殊的项目，用来帮助年轻运动员。刘翔就在他们之中。他的赛跑被记录，并且他被和世界上最好的体育明星作比较。孙海平用这些信息改变对刘翔的训练方法。
在2001年5月，刘翔在对日本赢得了他收个国际110米跨栏比赛。在2004年，他为中国赢得了第一枚110米跨栏比赛的奥运会金牌，并且同时打破了奥运会记录。这也是跨栏比赛的奥运金牌第一次被挂在了来自亚洲国家的运动员的脖子上。
刘翔训练非常刻苦。事实上，他训练如此刻苦，以至于伤了他的脚。从2008年开始，他饱受脚伤的折磨，但是他没有放弃。尽管他错过了一些比赛，但是在2012年他仍然重返世界110米跨栏比赛第一名的位置。遗憾的是，他的脚伤阻止了他完成2012年伦敦奥运会。但是他仍然是勇气和成功的象征，并且我们继续以他为骄傲。M9U1 托尼：爸爸, 我可以借一下你的照相机吗？ 爸爸：做什么用呢？
托尼：我想在下周学校组织参观博物馆时拍些照片。这些照片将发布在学校的网站上。其他班的同学、甚至生活在国外的人们，都有可以看到这些照片。
爸爸：听起来很好啊！我上学的时候，我们要等上好几周才能收到国外笔友的来信。但是现在可以在网上收发照片和信件，而且速度非常快。
托尼：是的，互联网和电脑已经改变了我们的生活。我们在课堂上甚至都可以使用电子书。我在想，未来是否电脑会比书籍使用得更多？
爸爸：有可能。过去，我们主要从纸质书中获取信息。有些书甚至有几千页厚。现在，伴随着电脑和电子科技的发明，我们从网络上获取信息变得非常容易。互联网比图书要强大得多。托尼：但是，关于照相机……? 爸爸：哦，可以。给你。自从你妈妈的生日之后，我就没用过，存储卡有可能都满了。托尼：好的。这可以解决。我有一个空的存储卡。说明书在哪里？
爸爸：在相机包里。因为它是你妈妈送给我的生日礼物，所以你必须保证要保管好它。如果一定要借给其他人的话，你要告诉他们如何正确使用它。托尼：我保证。
M9U2 书籍将被因特网取代吗？
每天早上，我爸爸在去上班的路上买份报纸。每天，我在课堂上打开书开始上课。每天晚上，我妈妈都在家浏览报纸。而且每天夜晚之前，都看着卧室墙上大卫.贝克汉姆和姚明的照片。我们能想象没有报纸和印刷术的生活吗？
纸是大约2000年前在中国被首次创造出来的。在它的发明之后，人们开始在纸上写字来制书。在那个年代，书是靠手工制作的，一次只能制作一本。因此，书籍又少，价格又贵。所以，很少有人有机会学者读书。印刷术是在中国隋唐时期发明的。后来，印刷术的发展使更快更便宜地制造书籍成为可能。书的交易形成了，更多的人学者读书，知识和思想比以前传播得更快了。在某种程度上，我们把纸和印刷术的发明与20世纪因特网的引入相媲美。
尽管因特网还在初期，但它发展很快，而且可能比印刷术变得更强大。在因特网上比在书籍中更大的信息量会以更多样化的形式被存储。使用网络连接的人比在印刷品中寻找信息的人能更容易地找到信息。我们用来阅读信息的机器现在又小又轻，经常比一本单独的书更小更轻。
现在电脑和因特网在教室中被使用。报纸和杂志已经能够在线阅读。那么传统的印刷术未来的方向是什么？书籍将被因特网取代吗？让我们拭目以待。
M10U1 托尼：爸爸，我需要你的帮助。老师让我们选择一个我们想去的国家，想像我们就在那里，然后给家里的父母写一封信。我选择了澳大利亚，我该如何写呢？
爸爸：别担心！我有一些去年在澳大利亚拍的照片，也许可以帮到你。我们来看一看吧。这块岩石叫做艾尔斯岩，位于澳大利亚中部。据当地人说，这是一个奇特而具有魔力的地方。托尼：哦，看起来很大啊！它有多高？
爸爸：348米。这是悉尼歌剧院。它就像一艘巨大的帆船，三面环水。这一张是大堡礁。托尼：它是位于澳大利亚东北海岸吗？
爸爸：是的，它有2600多公里长。它是一个伟大的自然奇观。这里还有一些我的澳大利亚朋友的照片。他们是牧羊的农民。他们戴着能赶走苍蝇的特制的帽子。他们拿着的剪刀是用来剪羊毛的。你知道许多澳大利亚人来自英国吗？
托尼：是的，当然了。那就是他们为什么说英语的原因。您在那儿的时候记日记了吗？ 爸爸：记了，你可以读读。
托尼：太棒了！你不喜欢澳大利亚的哪些方面呢？
爸爸：我讨厌到处都有蚂蚁。我得把它们从我衣服上掸掉，特别是裤子上。托尼：在您的裤子上有蚂蚁！太有趣了！爸爸：当时可并不有趣！
M10U2 亲爱的妈妈、爸爸：
我现在是在澳大利亚的中部给你们写这封信。现在，我们在艾尔斯岩附近。在第一天，我们乘飞机参观了艾尔斯岩，我对它如此之大感到惊奇:3.6千米长，348米高。在一条里的不同时期，这块岩石的颜色变成深蓝色、紫色、黄色和红色。艾尔斯岩是当地澳大利亚土著文化的一个中心。澳大利亚土著居民是最早生活在澳大利亚的人，他们的古老故事讲述了创造世界的精灵。
澳大利亚人与英国人有紧密的关系。许多人有英国亲戚，他们在很多方面与我们相似。澳大利亚人最喜欢的食物是火腿和牛肉加许多沙拉。他们也种植葡萄和其他的水果。他们喜欢所有的运动，但是他们最喜欢的运动时澳式足球。因为大多数澳大利亚人住在海岸边，所以他们也喜欢去海滩游泳、冲浪，或者只是躺在阳光下。
尽管现在是12月，但这是是夏季。阳光十分灿烂，海边的乡村碧绿。田野里和小山上有许多羊，但是乡村中部没有树和草，只有岩石和沙子„„还有袋鼠！
澳大利亚人讲英语，但是用他们自己的方式。例如，当他们说“G'day!”和“No worries.”时，他们的意思是“你好！”和“不要担心。没问题！”
在第二天，我们去骑马了。我骑的马很懒，因此我远远落后于别人，但是我喜欢慢的、轻松的骑马。今晚晚些时候，我们会乘飞机回到悉尼，然后回家。这真是一次令人愉快的旅行。爱你们的 托尼
M11U1 大明：托尼，你会参加摄影比赛吗？
托尼：当然了！我今年要赢过何忠，我不会让他赢两次的！大明：何忠是谁？
托尼：就是去年摄影大赛获胜的男孩！大明：那个在学校舞会上拍照的人？
托尼：对。问题是他真的很厉害。而且今年摄影比赛的整体标准高了很多。大明：我感觉我们能解决这些小问题。他们为今年选择的比赛主题是什么？ 托尼：“自然”、“故乡与他乡”、“城市与人”，还有“音乐”。
大明：我觉得何忠会选择“音乐”这个主题。你为什么不选择“故乡与他乡”这个主题，拍一些北京的照片？
托尼：但是北京不是我的故乡。我的故乡是剑桥。
大明：没关系。你可以拍一些北京的照片，再加上一些最近拍的剑桥的照片。
托尼：好主意。我堂弟在颐和园和中国小孩放风筝的那张照片怎么样？还有他第一次在剑桥读中文菜单时照的那张？
大明：好照片，我觉得你很可能赢。
M11U2 摄影比赛结果
今晚我非常高兴在这里宣读这次摄影比赛的获胜者。我们对本年度的比赛感到非常满意。与往年相比，我们收到了更多的(参赛)照片。尽管所有的照片都很出色，但是我们只能遗憾地说我们不能给每个人都颁奖。获得大自然主题将的是15岁的李伟。李伟拍的是香山公园的树。他的照片展示了山上不同的色彩。城市与人那一组中我们最喜欢的照片是赵敏拍摄的。赵敏只有12岁。她的照片展示的是一个刮大风的夜晚一个冲过马路的人。这个人是一个穿着女衬衫和裙子的漂亮女孩，她在保护她的书免受阵雨淋湿。音乐类最佳照片是何忠拍摄的。他拍摄的疯狂足迹乐队的照片表现了歌手贝基•王与乐队在一个音乐会上的表演。何忠设法展示了这支大的新乐队的动感与声音，以及他们的粉丝所感受到的快乐阳光。
展示北京和英国剑桥的一组照片获得了“家长与异乡”主题类奖。他们展示了一个小旅行者来我们国家的一些经历，和他对家乡的一些回忆。获胜者是托尼•史密斯！
祝贺我们的获胜者，并感谢所有的参赛者。现在让我们欢迎我们的校长向获胜者颁奖！
M12U1 玲玲：上完有关环境的课后，我对未来非常担心。污染是我们的大敌，我们必须和它作斗争。如果河流受到污染，农民就不能用河水去浇灌庄稼。
托尼：在有些地方，来自工厂的污染遍布城市和村庄。污染使人生病，甚至可以让人丧命。污染危及我们的健康。
贝蒂：路上的车非常多，这些车过多地耗油，也造成了污染。大明：但是我们仅仅是学生，对这些工厂和汽车无能为力。
贝蒂：谈论我们不能做的事是没有意义的。我们应该想一些我们能做的事。大明：比如说……? 玲玲：你认为我们可以使我们的学校变成绿色学校吗？ 大明：什么是绿色学校？
玲玲：在绿色学校里，每个班都收集可循环再生或再利用的废物。然后学校卖掉它们，筹集到的资金可以用来帮助贫困地区的学生。大明：好主意！
贝蒂：绿色学校的学生也学到了在家中节约能源和回收再利用的方法，这意味着减少浪费。
托尼：这是个好主意。尽管现在污染很严重，我认为还是有希望的。如果大家都开始采取一些措施，世界将会得到拯救。
M12U2 怎样才能变成“绿色”？
你有多“绿色”？回答下列问题，找出答案。你步行或骑自行车去上学吗？ 你仅仅因为时髦而买新衣服吗？ 离开房间时你关灯吗？
购物时你自己带包而不是要塑料袋吗？ 你买塑料饮料吗？瓶子空了时你怎样处理它们？ 你将废品分成可回收利用的和丢弃的吗？
我们都需要一个健康的环境，但我们每天制造废物，这对我们的环境是有害的。每天重复这三个单词:减少、重复利用和回收利用。减少
减少意思是“少用”。不要浪费东西。这节约钱并造成更少的污染。不要点多余你能吃完的食物。你不需要灯时关掉它们。买新东西前，想想是否真有必要，因为也许旧的恰恰一样好！重复利用
重复利用的意思是“再使用”。尽可能长时间地使用东西。照料它们以便他们会持续使用。如果可能，修理它们。不要扔掉它们而买新的。不要用纸杯或纸袋。用陶瓷杯子和布包更好，因为它们可以用许多次。回收利用一起是“将某件东西变成别的东西再利用”。虽然将一些东西变成别的东西需要能量，但是那比扔掉或者烧掉它们好。我们每年扔掉许多垃圾，我们必须改变。将你的垃圾分成塑料、玻璃、纸和橡胶。为整个社区制定一项回收利用政策。购买像再生纸之类的产品来帮助节约树木。
我们不能期待立竿见影的变化，但是让我们从今天就开始采取这些简单的措施吧，以便我们将来为我们的子孙拯救世界。
第13篇：新外研版九年级上册课文翻译(含对话)
2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
Module 1 Wonders of the world ’s more than 2000 years old.托尼:我们给《世界奇观》节目打电话，加入讨论吧。我觉得自然奇观比人造奇观更有趣。而且我认为巨人之路是最神奇的自然奇观。
玲玲:嗯，我没有见过巨人之路，所以我不知道该不该同意你的看法。你为什么会喜欢它呢，托尼？
托尼:哦，两年前我浏览了巨人之路。它非常大，由大约4万多块石块组成，大多数石块都有六个面。巨人之路位于北爱尔兰东海岸，绵延数百米。
玲玲:听起来很神奇，但我认为非洲的维多利亚瀑布更壮观。瀑布宽约1700米，高约100米，数千米之外就能听到瀑布的巨响。
贝蒂:哇！那么大啊！但是，在我看来，人造奇观比自然奇观更激动人心。就说兵马俑吧，它们都有两千多年的历史了。
大明:我同意你的看法，贝蒂。我觉得三峡大坝也很神奇。大坝长约2300米，高185米，顶部宽15米。它为中国数百万的人口供电。
贝蒂:那现在谁来拨打热线？
Unit 2 The Grand Canyon was not just big.By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
自然界的一大奇观
我到那里时是大清早，天下着雨。我朝东边看了看，天空变得灰蒙蒙的。我下了车，穿过一道门，沿着一条黑暗的小路前行。虽然什么也看不见，但我知道它就在那里。
大约走了一英里，小路边出现了一个陌生人。我问道：“我走的路对吗？”他知道我要去哪里。他答道：“对，五分钟后你就能到达那里。”终于，我走到一些岩石前停了下来。我朝那片岩石望过去，但是一片寂静，还是看不见它。
突然，雨停了，云散了。太阳从我身后升起，照在岩石上。地面(仿佛在随着光线)向下延伸，（逐渐）退落到下面的一条河里。我在眺望着这自然界奇观之一的大峡谷。
我俯视着距我一英里之遥的银色的科罗拉多河。即使你把世界上最高的两栋建筑物叠在一起放在谷底，它们仍就到不到了顶。然后我眺望峡谷的另一边。它大约在15英里之外，也许更远。最后，我向左右遥望，大峡谷向两边延伸, 长达200多英里。大峡谷不仅仅是大，而是巨大！
我在大峡谷伫立半小时有余，我问了自己一个问题：“大峡谷是自然界中最壮观的奇观吗？”我心中自然已有答案。你怎么认为呢？
Module 2 Public holidays
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）Unit 1 My family always go somewhere interesting as soon as the holiday begins.托尼: 玲玲, 10月1日是中国的国庆节，对吗？ 玲玲: 是的。中华人民共和国成立于1949年10月1日。从那时开始，中国人（每年）都庆祝国庆节。（国庆节时）到处都有鲜花和国旗，我们休假3天。
托尼: 这个国庆假期你有什么计划吗？
玲玲: 有。我和爸爸妈妈准备去山东省拜访一些朋友。我们会一直待在那里，直至假期结束。和朋友们在一起期间，我们会去青岛玩一天。贝蒂，你们的国庆节是什么时候呀？
贝蒂: 我们的国庆节叫独立日，在7月4日。从1777年以来，我们一直庆祝这个节日。独立日是一个公共假日，但我们只放一天假。那一天有各种各样的节日活动。这个时间是休假季节的开始，大多数人都会在七月或八月的某段时间休假。
玲玲: 那天有什么特别的事情吗？
贝蒂: 嗯，到处都可以看到美国国旗。我们通常会去一些好地方野餐。孩子们玩得可开以了。我们也可以在公园里观看乐队演奏乐曲。
大明: 托尼，你们英国也过国庆节吗？
托尼: 不，我们没有。我们放假两天庆祝圣诞节。假期一开始，我们一家就会去某人好玩的地方。
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
Unit 2 We have celebrated the festival since the first pioneers arrived in America.感恩节
感恩节是美国的一个节日。人们在每年十一月的 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）行。大游行沿着几条街道进行，在著名的梅西百货公司结束。感恩节是圣诞季的开始，我们开始逛街购买礼物。足球在感恩节也是重要的，因为有许多球队进行比赛。和许多美国人一样，我们通常在电视上观看比赛，尽享乐趣。
Module 3 Heroes later.李老师： 大明，谁是你的英雄？你要选择谁来讲述呢？
大明： 邓亚萍！她是我的英雄，因为她是世界上最棒的乒乓选手之一，而且我喜欢打乒乓球。
李老师： 那就给我们讲讲她！
大明： 嗯，她五岁开始练球。她训练刻苦，所以后来成了一名伟大的乒乓球选手。
李老师： 她赢过哪些比赛呢？
大明： 她获得过许多次世界冠军，包括四枚奥运会金牌。她24岁时退役。
李老师：后来她做了什么呢？她开始在北京读清华大学，后来到国外大学深造。刚开始的时候，她的英语并不好，她还是刻苦努力，7年后，她获得了剑桥大学的博士学位。她无论做什么，都不放弃。
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）李老师：真是太不可思议了！
大明： 是的。邓亚萍说她并不比任何人聪明，但她拥有非常坚强的意志。
李老师：我明白了。嗯，我觉得她不仅是一位出色的运动员，而且还是一个好学生。
大明： 是的。而且北京奥运会成为世界体育运动的一次胜利，也有她的功劳。她就是最棒的！
李老师： 她是一位真正的英雄。
Unit 2 There were few doctors, so he had to work very hard on his own.我的英雄---白求恩大夫
诺曼●白求恩是中国最有名的英雄之一。他是一位加拿大医生。他来到中国，帮助中国人民并为他们而献身。
诺曼●白求恩出生于1890年。他于1916年成为一名医生，并于1936年去了西班牙，治疗那里在战争期间受伤的士兵。他很快意识到许多人因为没有尽快送往医院而濒临死亡。白求恩大夫研发了新方法来照顾病人。他发明了在医院外面和靠近交战地区使用的特殊医疗器械，这样医生就能够更快地治疗伤员。他的发明挽救了许多人的生命。
1938年，白求恩大夫来到了中国，在抗日战争期间帮助治疗伤员。那时中国医生很少，因此，他不得不独自很努
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）力地工作。他在西班牙治疗伤员的经验在中国非常有用。他为当地的医生和护士开设培训课程，而且写书以便他们能够学习他是如何治疗病人的。
白求恩大夫经常非常辛苦地工作，不休息也不照顾自己。曾经有一次，他甚至不停地工作了69个小时，成功挽救了一百多人的生命。在1939年的一天，在手术时，他割伤了自己的手指，但他没有处理伤口，仍然继续工作。最后，他因伤去世。
白求恩大夫为中国人民所作的工作使他成为中国人民心目中的英雄。有许多关于他的书籍和电影，而且在中国和加拿大，人们现在仍然怀念他。
托尼:
Module 4 Home alone
Unit 1 I can look after myself, although it won’t be easy for me.妈妈：我们是哪个车次？
爸爸：T27，到拉萨，从2号站台出发。
妈妈：贝蒂，这次拉萨会议对我们来说非常重要，但是很遗憾你不能和我们一起去。
贝蒂: 我也是（很遗憾），但是我不能两周不上课。
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）妈妈：你记住我交待给你的所有的事了吗？特别要注意家门，在家时工关好门，离开家时要锁好门。
贝蒂: 好的，妈妈！我能照顾好自己，尽管那对我来说不那么容易。
贝蒂: 嗯，要保证每天都吃大量的新鲜水果和蔬菜。我还给你留了许多你喜欢的饼干。
贝蒂: 别担心。我能做简单的饭菜。爸爸：早上也没人叫你起床了。
贝蒂: 没事的，我的闹钟很响，肯定能把我叫醒。妈妈：我总觉得忘了什么事情，但就是想不起来。（广播：乘坐T27次列车前往拉萨的旅客们，请马上到2号站台上车，你的火车要开了。）
贝蒂: 说的就是你们的火车！妈妈，再见！爸爸，再见！
妈妈：我知道了！我还没给你留我们在拉萨的地址呢？
贝蒂: 发短信给我吧。旅途愉快！妈妈：再见了，宝贝！贝蒂: 再见，两周后再见了！
Unit 2 I became so bored with their orders that I wished they would leave me alone.By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
我的“完美假期”
作为一个男孩，就像其他所有男孩一样，我想做个男子汉。但我父母为我做一切事情。实际上，他们安排了我生活中的分钟。尽管他们爱我，但我对他们有点儿满。“郑晨宇，做作业！”“练钢琴！”“关了电视！”对于他们的指令，我非常厌烦，以至于我真希望他们别管我。
哦，我的愿望实现了！尽管父母对离开我非常担心，但他们不得不出差几天。现在，我的机会来了！我终于能玩得开心了！2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
当父母回家时，他们发现我会做饭和整理家务了，很高兴。我告诉了他们我独自在家的经历，然后我们都笑了。
Module 5 Museums
Unit 1 Don’t cro that rope.（贝蒂、玲玲和大明在博物馆三楼。）贝蒂: 多好的博物馆啊！
玲玲: 真是太棒了，对吗？ 我们去楼上的动物展厅吧。我需要一些有关研究性学习的资料。
贝蒂: 我也是。我们走吧！等一下，大明去哪里了？ 玲玲: 他在那里！他在那里干什么？
大明: 嗨，贝蒂，玲玲！快过来看看猴子展览。保安：请勿喧哗！这是违反规定的。贝蒂: 哦，不会吧！大明又惹麻烦了？
大明: 看那只猴子的尾巴！我要从这里进去…….保安：快停下!不要越过那条绳子!你没看到这个标识吗,孩子? 禁止进入!大明: 噢!为什么不能进? 保安：因为它关闭了.玲玲: 对,大明.你看那个标识。
大明: 哦，没错。太不好了！嗯，那我就拍张照片…… 保安：对不起。请勿拍照, 看到了吗? 大明: 这个博物馆哪来这么多规章制度。难怪这个地
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）方没什么人呢！
贝蒂: 大明，不能没有礼貌。玲玲: 哦不！
贝蒂: 怎么了，玲玲？
玲玲: 我的手机！我的手机不见了！哦不！我该怎么办？
保安：不要担心，女士！到楼下失物招领处去。也许手机在那里。
玲玲: 那可是一部新手机啊！我一定要找到它，要不然妈妈会处罚我的！
贝蒂: 我想没事的，玲玲。我们现在去看看。大明：是的，我们下楼！
Unit 2 If you ever go to London , make sure you visit the Science Museum.伦敦科学博物馆
欢迎来到伦敦最友好的博物馆。大多数博物馆都禁止喧哗、乱跑，而且禁止触摸任何东西。但是科学博物馆不一样。。。这里是嘈杂的！人们谈论他们在这里能看到和能做的事情。博物馆内也有些噪声很大的机器。如果你想要得到关于科学的所有问题的答案，你来对地方了。
我喜欢参观三楼和四楼的展厅。你不仅可以了解数学、物理学和化学知识，而且还能了解通讯和环境知识。例
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）如，你能弄清楚人们是如何从地下挖煤并用它来创造能量的。在一个展厅里他们甚至会解释X光是如何让你看到你身体内部的。
四楼的发射台是最受欢迎的展厅，它也是我的最爱，因为有许多物理实验可以做。例如，如果想把一个袋子装满沙子，你就得操控一种带轮子的运输车，并把车移动到正确的位置。你也能够弄清楚人们是如何到太空旅行并返回的。
在五楼和六楼，你可以了解过去的药物是什么样的。如果你把过去的药物也现在的药物作一下比较，下次你去看医生的时候会感觉非常幸运！
对各个年龄段的人来说科学博物馆是有趣的。在那里，你总能发现新的东西并玩得很快乐。博物馆免费进入，所以你可以在那里待几分钟或者一整天。它每天从上午十点到下午六点开放。所以如果你去伦敦的话，一定要参观科学博物馆。它是全世界我最喜欢的博物馆。
Module 6 Problems
Unit 1 If I start after dinner, I’ll finish it before I go to bed.爸爸: 托尼，你又在弹吉它，你家庭作业完成了吗？ 托尼: 没，还没有，但是今天作业不多。如果我晚饭后开始做，睡觉前肯定能做完。而且，你不是想让我学一门乐器吗？
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）爸爸: 我想让你养成一回家就做家庭作业的习惯。如果你现在开始做，晚饭前你就能做完了。
托尼: 是的，但是放学后我想休息一下。我还想去图书馆做点志愿者工作。
爸爸: 那么你现在不做作业了？
托尼: 不做，没有必要现在做。我迟点儿再做。爸爸: 真遗憾！我真的认为你不应该如此频繁地去图书馆。
托尼: 为什么？我可以在图书馆干活儿，而且还能在那里看书。
爸爸: 托尼，这不行。如果你老是做这些与学习无关的事，你就没时间学习了。
托尼: 你的意思是不想让我去社区服务，不让我增加对世界的认知吗？
爸爸: 我不是这个意思。但你要权衡哪件事情最重要。我不想让你考试不及格。
托尼: 但是……
爸爸: 没完成家庭作业之前,你什么也不能干。我很抱歉,但这是我的最终决定。
Unit 2 If you tell him the truth now , you will show that you are honest.By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
致戴安娜
你有困难吗？那就给《新标准杂志》的戴安娜写信，寻求她的建议吧。
亲爱的戴安娜：
上周，我的朋友大卫带着一个新的电脑游戏到我家，请求在我爸爸的电脑上玩游戏。我很担心，因为在使用爸爸的电脑之前应该先问他一下。他用电脑工作，我只能用它来做作业。原因是：他认为如果我在电脑上玩游戏的话，电脑会出故障。
哦，当爸爸不在家时，我们决定试着玩一下大卫的游戏。我们把它复制到电脑上，我们玩完游戏后，把它从电脑上删除了。然而，当我重新打开电脑，检查是否一切可好时，爸爸的一些文件不见了。后来，昨天晚上，爸爸使用电脑时，他非常生气。他哪里都找不到那些文件了。它们是很重要的文件。
我没告诉他关于电脑游戏的事，因为我不想让他生我的气。现在我感觉难受。我不确定电脑工程师是否能把文件找回来。我应该告诉他关于电脑游戏的事吗？我应该花钱修理电脑吗？
你的朋友，史蒂夫
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）亲爱的史蒂夫：
噢，天哪！你犯了两个错误。太糟糕了，当你爸爸告诉你不要用他的电脑玩游戏时，你却用它玩了。更糟糕的是，你没告诉他关于那件事。如果你现在告诉他真相，他会生你的气，但至少能显示出你是诚实的。
你应该向你爸爸道歉，也要付修理电脑的费用。如果你主动放弃你的零花钱，你爸爸会意识到你的歉意。
记住下一次要和大卫踢足球，不要再玩电脑游戏！
最好的祝愿，戴安娜
Module 7 Great books
’re still influenced by Confucius’s ideas.杰克逊先生：你好，贝蒂。怎么了？
贝蒂：我想参加者一个网络小组，讨论一些伟大的作家写的名著。
杰克逊先生：那么，你认为伟大的作家都有谁啊？ 贝蒂：嗯，可能有孔子和萨士比亚吧。
杰克逊先生：真的吗？我承认他们都很伟大，因为至今还有很多人在阅读他们的著作。但是我更愿意把孔子描述
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）为一位教育家和思想家，而非作家。他是一位非常睿智的人。为了参与讨论，你们都得做些什么啊？
贝蒂：嗯，我们每人要读一本自己喜欢的书，并写一篇书评，以便参与讨论。
杰克逊先生：我明白了。现在，孔子的思想仍然在影响着我们，萨士比亚的戏剧对我们来说也仍然很有意义。人们一直以来并且将来仍然会阅读这些名著作。顺便问一下，你觉得19世纪美国伟大的作家马克.吐温怎么样啊? 贝蒂：他是一位重要的作家，但我觉得他不像孔子和萨士比亚那么有名。
杰克逊先生：对，但他的小说仍然很受欢迎。他的一本小说《汤姆.索耶历险记》是我非常喜欢的。
贝蒂：太好了！那你为什么不加入讨论并向我们介绍一下它呢？
Unit 2 It is still read and loved.>的书评
贝蒂金
我最喜欢的名著之一是马克吐温写的>。故事以19世纪美国密苏里州圣彼得堡镇为背景。它讲述了一个经历了许多冒险的男孩的一些令人激动的故事。
书的主人公汤姆和他的波莉阿姨一起生活。他是一个
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）活泼聪明的男孩。他不喜欢人们告诉他做什么，所以他总是遇到麻烦。他和他最好的朋友哈克„芬恩逃到密西西比河中部的一个岛上。汤姆遇到更多的麻烦，因为一个名叫印 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）托尼: 对。我正在训练，为下周的那场重要比赛做准备。
贝蒂: 你们和哪个队比赛？ 托尼: HAS。玲玲: HAS代表什么？ 托尼: 海淀全明星队。
贝蒂: 噢，是的。这将是一场艰难的比赛。上次比赛中他们不是把你们打败了吗？
托尼: 是的，打败了。但是…… 玲玲: 比分是多少？
贝蒂: 如果我没有记错的话，海淀全明星98分，北京国际巨人52分。
托尼: 但是大明上次没有被选上参加比赛。那真是个糟糕的决定。我们没有他打不好比赛。
玲玲: 那可不是借口！
托尼: 但是现在大明回来了。这个赛季两只球队没有多大差异。
贝蒂: 比赛什么时候进行？
托尼: 下周六中午。如果你们想有好座位的话，你们应该在11点半之前来。你们来吗？
贝蒂: 我不确定。你认为他们会赢吗，玲玲？ 玲玲: 绝对不可能！今年你们和海淀全明星队打过多
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）少场比赛？
托尼: 嗯，大概三场。贝蒂: 那他们赢过几次呢？ 托尼: 呃，几乎都是他们获胜。
贝蒂: 不对！所有的比赛他们都获胜了！面对事实吧，托尼！你们没有机会了！
托尼: 我不同意！这不公平！（托尼生气地离开了。）
玲玲: 记住要传球，而不是踢球，托尼！
贝蒂: 他真的生我们的气了，所以会全力以赴去赢得这场比赛来证明我们错了。
玲玲: 干得好，贝蒂！我太希望他们这次能赢了。我们一定到场为他们加油。
Unit 2 He was invited to competitions around the world.刘翔--为赢而战
对刘翔来说，作为一位体育英雄的生活开始于2004年。首先，他被邀请参加世界各地的比赛，然后他被选人雅典奥运会归家队，并赢得一枚金牌。
一开始刘翔并不是一名成功的运动员。他于1983年7月13日出生于上海，当他很年轻的时候就开始训练，在4年级时，他去了上海普陀区的体校。期初，刘被鼓励训练调高。在1998年刘翔跨栏赛跑的能力被孙海平注意到了，孙
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）海平后来成为他的教练。2001年创立了一个特殊的项目，用来帮助年轻运动员。刘翔就在他们之中。他的赛跑被记录，并且他被和世界上最好的体育明星作比较。孙海平用这些信息改变对刘翔的训练方法。
在2001年5月，刘翔在对日本赢得了他收个国际110米跨栏比赛。在2004年，他为中国赢得了 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）这些照片将发布在学校的网站上。其他班的同学、甚至生活在国外的人们，都有可以看到这些照片。
爸爸：听起来很好啊！我上学的时候，我们要等上好几周才能收到国外笔友的来信。但是现在可以在网上收发照片和信件，而且速度非常快。
托尼：是的，互联网和电脑已经改变了我们的生活。我们在课堂上甚至都可以使用电子书。我在想，未来是否电脑会比书籍使用得更多？
爸爸：有可能。过去，我们主要从纸质书中获取信息。有些书甚至有几千页厚。现在，伴随着电脑和电子科技的发明，我们从网络上获取信息变得非常容易。互联网比图书要强大得多。
托尼：但是，关于照相机……? 爸爸：哦，可以。给你。自从你妈妈的生日之后，我就没用过，存储卡有可能都满了。
托尼：好的。这可以解决。我有一个空的存储卡。说明书在哪里？
爸爸：在相机包里。因为它是你妈妈送给我的生日礼物，所以你必须保证要保管好它。如果一定要借给其他人的话，你要告诉他们如何正确使用它。
托尼：我保证。
Unit 2 Will books be replaced by the Internet ?
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
书籍将被因特网取代吗？
每天早上，我爸爸在去上班的路上买份报纸。每天，我在课堂上打开书开始上课。每天晚上，我妈妈都在家浏览报纸。而且每天夜晚之前，都看着卧室墙上大卫.贝克汉姆和姚明的照片。我们能想象没有报纸和印刷术的生活吗？
纸是大约2000年前在中国被首次创造出来的。在它的发明之后，人们开始在纸上写字来制书。在那个年代，书是靠手工制作的，一次只能制作一本。因此，书籍又少，价格又贵。所以，很少有人有机会学者读书。
印刷术是在中国隋唐时期发明的。后来，印刷术的发展使更快更便宜地制造书籍成为可能。书的交易形成了，更多的人学者读书，知识和思想比以前传播得更快了。在某种程度上，我们把纸和印刷术的发明与20世纪因特网的引入相媲美。
尽管因特网还在初期，但它发展很快，而且可能比印刷术变得更强大。在因特网上比在书籍中更大的信息量会以更多样化的形式被存储。使用网络连接的人比在印刷品中寻找信息的人能更容易地找到信息。我们用来阅读信息的机器现在又小又轻，经常比一本单独的书更小更轻。
现在电脑和因特网在教室中被使用。报纸和杂志已经能够在线阅读。那么传统的印刷术未来的方向是什么？书籍将被因特网取代吗？让我们拭目以待。
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
Module 10 Australia
Unit 1 I have some photos that I took in Australia last year.托尼：爸爸，我需要你的帮助。老师让我们选择一个我们想去的国家，想像我们就在那里，然后给家里的父母写一封信。我选择了澳大利亚，我该如何写呢？
爸爸：别担心！我有一些去年在澳大利亚拍的照片，也许可以帮到你。我们来看一看吧。这块岩石叫做艾尔斯岩，位于澳大利亚中部。据当地人说，这是一个奇特而具有魔力的地方。
托尼：哦，看起来很大啊！它有多高？
爸爸：348米。这是悉尼歌剧院。它就像一艘巨大的帆船，三面环水。这一张是大堡礁。
托尼：它是位于澳大利亚东北海岸吗？
爸爸：是的，它有2600多公里长。它是一个伟大的自然奇观。这里还有一些我的澳大利亚朋友的照片。他们是牧羊的农民。他们戴着能赶走苍蝇的特制的帽子。他们拿着的剪刀是用来剪羊毛的。你知道许多澳大利亚人来自英国吗？
托尼：是的，当然了。那就是他们为什么说英语的原因。您在那儿的时候记日记了吗？
爸爸：记了，你可以读读。
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）托尼：太棒了！你不喜欢澳大利亚的哪些方面呢？ 爸爸：我讨厌到处都有蚂蚁。我得把它们从我衣服上掸掉，特别是裤子上。
托尼：在您的裤子上有蚂蚁！太有趣了！爸爸：当时可并不有趣！
Unit 2 The game that they like most is Australian football.亲爱的妈妈、爸爸：
我现在是在澳大利亚的中部给你们写这封信。现在，我们在艾尔斯岩附近。在 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）海边的乡村碧绿。田野里和小山上有许多羊，但是乡村中部没有树和草，只有岩石和沙子„„还有袋鼠！
澳大利亚人讲英语，但是用他们自己的方式。例如，当他们说“G'day!”和“No worries.”时，他们的意思是“你好！”和“不要担心。没问题！”
在 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）大明：我感觉我们能解决这些小问题。他们为今年选择的比赛主题是什么？
托尼：“自然”、“故乡与他乡”、“城市与人”，还有“音乐”。
大明：我觉得何忠会选择“音乐”这个主题。你为什么不选择“故乡与他乡”这个主题，拍一些北京的照片？
托尼：但是北京不是我的故乡。我的故乡是剑桥。大明：没关系。你可以拍一些北京的照片，再加上一些最近拍的剑桥的照片。
托尼：好主意。我堂弟在颐和园和中国小孩放风筝的那张照片怎么样？还有他 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）山公园的树。他的照片展示了山上不同的色彩。
城市与人那一组中我们最喜欢的照片是赵敏拍摄的。赵敏只有12岁。她的照片展示的是一个刮大风的夜晚一个冲过马路的人。这个人是一个穿着女衬衫和裙子的漂亮女孩，她在保护她的书免受阵雨淋湿。
音乐类最佳照片是何忠拍摄的。他拍摄的疯狂足迹乐队的照片表现了歌手贝基•王与乐队在一个音乐会上的表演。何忠设法展示了这支大的新乐队的动感与声音，以及他们的粉丝所感受到的快乐阳光。
展示北京和英国剑桥的一组照片获得了“家长与异乡”主题类奖。他们展示了一个小旅行者来我们国家的一些经历，和他对家乡的一些回忆。获胜者是托尼•史密斯！
祝贺我们的获胜者，并感谢所有的参赛者。现在让我们欢迎我们的校长向获胜者颁奖！
Module 12 Save our world
Unit 1 If everyone starts to do something, the world will be saved.玲玲：上完有关环境的课后，我对未来非常担心。污染是我们的大敌，我们必须和它作斗争。如果河流受到污染，农民就不能用河水去浇灌庄稼。
托尼：在有些地方，来自工厂的污染遍布城市和村庄。
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）污染使人生病，甚至可以让人丧命。污染危及我们的健康。
贝蒂：路上的车非常多，这些车过多地耗油，也造成了污染。
大明：但是我们仅仅是学生，对这些工厂和汽车无能为力。
贝蒂：谈论我们不能做的事是没有意义的。我们应该想一些我们能做的事。
大明：比如说……? 玲玲：你认为我们可以使我们的学校变成绿色学校吗？
大明：什么是绿色学校？
玲玲：在绿色学校里，每个班都收集可循环再生或再利用的废物。然后学校卖掉它们，筹集到的资金可以用来帮助贫困地区的学生。
大明：好主意！
贝蒂：绿色学校的学生也学到了在家中节约能源和回收再利用的方法，这意味着减少浪费。
托尼：这是个好主意。尽管现在污染很严重，我认为还是有希望的。如果大家都开始采取一些措施，世界将会得到拯救。
Unit 2 Repeat these three words daily: reduce, reuse and recycle.By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）
怎样才能变成“绿色”？
你有多“绿色”？回答下列问题，找出答案。你步行或骑自行车去上学吗？ 你仅仅因为时髦而买新衣服吗？ 离开房间时你关灯吗？
购物时你自己带包而不是要塑料袋吗？
你买塑料饮料吗？瓶子空了时你怎样处理它们？ 你将废品分成可回收利用的和丢弃的吗？
我们都需要一个健康的环境，但我们每天制造废物，这对我们的环境是有害的。每天重复这三个单词:减少、重复利用和回收利用。
减少
减少意思是“少用”。不要浪费东西。这节约钱并造成更少的污染。不要点多余你能吃完的食物。你不需要灯时关掉它们。买新东西前，想想是否真有必要，因为也许旧的恰恰一样好！
重复利用
重复利用的意思是“再使用”。尽可能长时间地使用东西。照料它们以便他们会持续使用。如果可能，修理它们。不要扔掉它们而买新的。不要用纸杯或纸袋。用陶瓷杯子和布包更好，因为它们可以用许多次。
回收利用一起是“将某件东西变成别的东西再利用”。
By wlonely 2015外研版九年级上册英语课本翻译（对话+课文）虽然将一些东西变成别的东西需要能量，但是那比扔掉或者烧掉它们好。我们每年扔掉许多垃圾，我们必须改变。将你的垃圾分成塑料、玻璃、纸和橡胶。为整个社区制定一项回收利用政策。购买像再生纸之类的产品来帮助节约树木。
我们不能期待立竿见影的变化，但是让我们从今天就开始采取这些简单的措施吧，以便我们将来为我们的子孙拯救世界。
By wlonely
版权声明：
1.大文斗范文网的资料来自互联网以及用户的投稿，用于非商业性学习目的免费阅览。
2.《外研版九年级上册教学工作总结（共13篇）》一文的著作权归原作者所有，仅供学习参考，转载或引用时请保留版权信息。
3.如果本网所转载内容不慎侵犯了您的权益，请联系我们，我们将会及时删除。